WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .....................................................104
4STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................126
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................184
6SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................244
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................291
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................306
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................368
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................377
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................382
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................13
Key Fob........................................................................ 13
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................15
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE)..................17
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ......... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 18
Remote Start Cancel Message .................................. 18
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ......................19
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................19
To Arm The System .................................................... 20
To Disarm The System ............................................... 20
Rearming Of The System............................................ 20
DOORS ................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...............................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ................................................................21
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .........................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....23
Front Door Removal.....................................................24
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ...................27
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped
S
........................29
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped
S
...................31
STEERING WHEEL...............................................................36
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................36
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped........................37
SEATS ..................................................................................37
Manual Adjustment Front Seats.................................37
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —
Four Door Models ........................................................39
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models.......39
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................41
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ...............................41
Head Restraints...........................................................41
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .....................................44
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................44
Basic Voice Commands...............................................44
Get Started...................................................................44
Additional Information.................................................45
MIRRORS ............................................................................45
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................45
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..........................................46
Outside Mirrors ...........................................................46
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If Equipped........46
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................................46
Power Mirrors — If Equipped.......................................46
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
S
.................................. 47
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 47
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 47
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 47
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 48
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 48
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 49
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 49
Security ........................................................................ 49
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 50
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 50
Headlight Switch.......................................................... 50
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped ......... 51
High/Low Beam Switch............................................... 51
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................................. 51
Flash-To-Pass............................................................... 51
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 51
Lights-On Reminder..................................................... 51
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ................................... 52
Turn Signals................................................................. 52
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 52
INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 52
Interior Courtesy Lights............................................... 52
Dimmer Control ........................................................... 53
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS........................... 53
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................................... 53
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped .............. 54
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................54
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 54
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions..................................................................... 57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .................................................................. 59
Climate Voice Commands ......................................... 59
Operating Tips ............................................................ 59
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................60
Storage ........................................................................ 60
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped............................. 61
USB/AUX Control......................................................... 61
Power Outlets ............................................................. 62
Power Inverter — If Equipped .................................... 63
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............................... 64
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ................................65
Auto-Down Feature .................................................... 66
Window Lockout Switch.............................................. 66
Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 66
WRANGLER TOPS ..............................................................66
Provided Tools............................................................. 66
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
Position
S
................................................................. 67
Raising The Soft Top
S
............................................ 77
Removing The Soft Top
S
....................................... 80
Installing The Soft Top ................................................ 81
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal
S
....................... 83
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation.......................... 87
Removing The Hard Top ............................................. 87
Installing The Hard Top............................................... 89
Sunrider® For Hard Top ............................................. 89
Power Sliding Top — If Equipped................................ 91
DOOR FRAME .....................................................................95
Door Frame Removal...................................................95
Door Frame Installation Four Door Models —
If Equipped...................................................................96
Door Frame Installation Two Door Models —
If Equipped...................................................................97
FOLDING WINDSHIELD .....................................................97
Lowering The Windshield ............................................98
Raising The Windshield ...............................................99
HOOD ................................................................................ 100
Opening The Hood .................................................... 100
Closing The Hood...................................................... 101
REAR SWING GATE ......................................................... 101
Cargo Area Features................................................. 102
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........................ 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................................. 104
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
S
...................... 108
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................................. 108
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ..................................................................... 109
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
S
....................... 110
Display And Messages ............................................. 110
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items ......... 112
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped ... 114
Diesel Displays.......................................................... 115
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ............... 115
Fuel System Messages ............................................ 116
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..............................116
Red Warning Lights...................................................117
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................................119
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................122
Green Indicator Lights...............................................123
White Indicator Lights ...............................................123
Blue Indicator Lights .................................................124
Gray Indicator Lights .................................................124
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...................124
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .............................................................125
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................................125
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ...................................................................126
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......................126
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...................126
Normal Starting ........................................................126
AutoPark ....................................................................127
Extended Park Starting .............................................128
If Engine Fails To Start..............................................128
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ..128
After Starting..............................................................129
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ...................................................................129
Automatic Transmission ...........................................129
Extreme Cold Weather ..............................................129
Normal Starting .........................................................130
Starting Fluids............................................................130
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ..................... 130
Cold Weather Precautions........................................ 131
Engine Idling.............................................................. 131
Stopping The Engine................................................. 132
Cooling System Tips — Automatic Transmission.....132
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ................................ 133
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — DIESEL
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED).................................................... 133
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................. 133
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED.................... 134
Shifting....................................................................... 135
Downshifting.............................................................. 136
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .............. 137
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................137
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ...................................................................... 138
8–Speed Automatic Transmission .......................... 138
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ............................... 140
Four-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped ............ 141
Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped.............. 142
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ............................ 144
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear — If Equipped ... 144
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If Equipped .......... 144
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped ...... 145
Off Road+ — If Equipped........................................... 146
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.................... 146
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 147
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 147
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.. 148
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode.......... 148
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System ......... 148
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System.......... 149
System Malfunction.................................................. 149
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 149
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 149
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .................................................................... 150
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 150
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 150
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 151
System Malfunction.................................................. 151
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 151
Cruise Control ........................................................... 151
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 152
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED...... 160
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 160
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 160
ParkSense Display.................................................... 160
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......................... 162
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System... 162
Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 163
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 163
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........................... 163
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 164
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 165
Fuel Filler Cap ........................................................... 165
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............................... 166
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 166
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel............................... 167
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel.............................. 167
Diesel Exhaust Fluid................................................. 167
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................................... 169
Certification Label..................................................... 169
TRAILER TOWING ............................................................170
Common Towing Definitions.....................................170
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................172
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .....................................................................172
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................................173
Towing Requirements ...............................................173
Towing Tips ................................................................175
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)......176
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........176
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models...176
DRIVING TIPS....................................................................178
On-Road Driving Tips.................................................178
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................................178
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................................184
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................................184
UCONNECT SETTINGS ......................................................184
Customer Programmable Features .........................184
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ............................................197
System Overview ......................................................197
Drag & Drop Menu Bar .............................................200
Safety And General Information...............................200
UCONNECT MODES ..........................................................201
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................201
Radio Mode ..............................................................201
Media Mode ..............................................................210
Phone Mode .............................................................212
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 222
Android Auto™
S
.................................................... 222
Apple CarPlay®
S
.................................................. 224
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks.......................................................................... 225
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF EQUIPPED ...... 225
Is My Vehicle Connected? ........................................ 225
Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services .......... 226
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle Services ... 227
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ...................................... 228
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account ............. 237
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ....................................... 237
Connected Services SOS FAQs — If Equipped ........ 237
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock
FAQs .......................................................................... 237
Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs .... 237
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 238
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ............... 238
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance
FAQs — If Equipped .................................................. 238
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs ... 238
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs .. 239
Connected Services Account FAQs — If Equipped .. 239
Data Collection & Privacy ......................................... 240
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 240
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 241
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 241
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ......................................241
Drivetrain .................................................................. 242
Accessory Gauge ...................................................... 242
Pitch & Roll ............................................................... 242
TrailCam — If Equipped............................................. 243
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES .......................................................... 244
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................ 244
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) — If Equipped.... 244
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .................. 245
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...................................... 252
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ........... 252
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................................... 255
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............... 257
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ............................... 261
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ................... 261
Important Safety Precautions .................................. 261
Seat Belt Systems .................................................... 261
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).................. 267
Child Restraints ........................................................ 277
SAFETY TIPS..................................................................... 288
Transporting Passengers ......................................... 288
Transporting Pets ..................................................... 288
Connected Vehicles.................................................. 288
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ...................................................................... 288
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle................................................................ 290
Exhaust Gas .............................................................. 290
Carbon Monoxide Warnings..................................... 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 291
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................. 291
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
S
...............................293
Preparations For Jacking .........................................294
Jack Location ............................................................294
Spare Tire Removal ..................................................295
Jacking Instructions ..................................................295
JUMP STARTING ..............................................................298
Preparations For Jump Start.....................................298
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................................299
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.........................................300
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................................301
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........................................302
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.......................................303
Four–Wheel Drive Models ........................................303
Without The Key Fob.................................................304
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .....................304
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ..305
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)......................................305
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE ENGINE ...........306
Maintenance Plan .....................................................307
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .................310
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5
Biodiesel ....................................................................311
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Biodiesel.....313
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................................314
2.0L Gasoline Engine ...............................................314
3.6L Gasoline Engine ...............................................315
3.0L Diesel Engine ....................................................316
Checking Oil Level .....................................................317
Adding Washer Fluid .................................................317
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................................317
Pressure Washing .....................................................318
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 318
Engine Oil................................................................... 318
Engine Oil Filter ......................................................... 319
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ........................................... 319
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine............................................................. 321
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel Engine................ 321
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel —
Diesel Engine ............................................................ 323
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ............................................ 323
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ................................................. 323
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection...............................324
Air Conditioner Maintenance ................................... 324
Body Lubrication .......................................................326
Windshield Wiper Blades.......................................... 326
Exhaust System ........................................................ 328
Cooling System.......................................................... 328
Brake System ........................................................... 331
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ............................................... 332
Transfer Case ........................................................... 332
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ....................... 332
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .................. 333
Fuses ........................................................................ 333
Bulb Replacement .................................................... 342
TIRES ................................................................................ 345
Tire Safety Information............................................. 345
Tires — General Information..................................... 352
Tire Types................................................................... 355
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................ 355
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care..................................... 356
Snow Traction Devices ............................................ 357
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 358
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................................. 358
Treadwear ................................................................. 358
Traction Grades ........................................................ 359
Temperature Grades ................................................ 359
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 359
BODYWORK...................................................................... 360
Protection From Atmospheric Agents...................... 360
Body And Underbody Maintenance......................... 361
Preserving The Bodywork......................................... 361
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 362
Carpet Safety Information........................................ 362
Carpet Removal ........................................................ 363
Seats And Fabric Parts............................................. 367
Plastic And Coated Parts.......................................... 367
Leather Surfaces ...................................................... 367
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 367
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 368
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 368
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 368
Torque Specifications............................................... 368
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE ............... 369
2.0L Engine............................................................... 369
3.6L Engine............................................................... 369
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................ 369
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 369
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ................................... 370
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ............ 370
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 370
MMT In Gasoline....................................................... 370
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 370
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE .....................371
Diesel Fuel Specifications ........................................371
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ...................................371
FLUID CAPACITIES ...........................................................373
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................374
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................376
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................377
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................377
Prepare A List ............................................................377
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................377
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................377
Roadside Assistance.................................................377
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................378
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................378
Mexico........................................................................378
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................378
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY)...................................................................379
Service Contract .......................................................379
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................379
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................379
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................379
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........379
In Canada...................................................................380
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................380
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................380
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................381
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for rugged off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of
physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or a collision
Ú page 178.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped" or, if applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained
in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the
topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 116.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 117
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 117
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 117
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 117
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 118
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 118
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 118
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 118
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 118
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 118
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 118
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
Ú page 119
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 119
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 119
Red Warning Lights
1
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 120
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 120
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 120
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 120
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 120
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light
Ú page 120
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 120
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
Ú page 120
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 121
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 121
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 121
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 121
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 121
Yellow Warning Lights
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
Ú page 122
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 122
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Neutral Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Wait To Start Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 123
4WD Auto Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 123
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 123
2WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 124
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 124
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 124
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 124
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 124
White Indicator Lights
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start (if
equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and swing gate from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also
contains a mechanical key.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery condition may
be indicated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob button
pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harmful
to the environment. Please see an authorized dealer
for proper battery disposal
Ú page 381.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all the doors
and swing gate. To lock all the doors, push the lock button
once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and
the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with the
key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes
and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may be
damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong electrical
shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the
electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing
the key fob to direct sunlight.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the
Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the
doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indi-
cated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the fob
LED will no longer illuminate with a button press.
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting a
flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of
the fob. Pry until the cover unsnaps being careful not
to damage the seal. Proceed counterclockwise to
pry the remaining snaps until the battery cover can
be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot
and sliding the battery forward and up being careful
not to damage the electronic board underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure
the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery
until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly
aligned before snapping it back in place.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children. If
the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 381.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Igni-
tion, always remember to place the ignition in the
OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices (e.g. climate controls, heated
seats, etc.) are available.
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob may have
a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side of the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
CAUTION!
Do not press the mechanical key against the START/
STOP ignition button.
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver etc.)
to pry the button out of the ignition switch. This
button comes as an assembly, and is not removable.
This can damage the silicone shield.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 126.
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the message will
display “Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
Ú page 381.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and swing
gate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn
will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again will
shut the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) not illuminated
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 184. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the Remote
Start is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal
temperature and mode, dependent on the outside
ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their
previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,
with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 54.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change, and exit
the automatic defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
turning the climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or
exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Swing Gate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To Start
Indicator Light
Ú page 116 to extinguish before
cranking the engine. This allows time for the engine
preheat cycle to heat the cylinder air, and is normal in
cold weather.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and swing
gate will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn
will chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again will
shut the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
For additional Remote Start information, see
Ú page 18.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle
Security system provides both audible and visible signals.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 21.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push
the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
NOTE:
The mechanical key can be used to lock or unlock the
doors, swing gate (if equipped with a lock), glove
compartment, and console storage.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the doors, and
rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swing gate
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 184.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signals.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the igni-
tion and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the igni-
tion and remove the key from the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle
will unlock all doors and the swing gate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depending on
the selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 184.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a START/STOP
ignition. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry
is disabled using Uconnect system, the key fob protection
described in this section remains active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe
operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch, and then the doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into
the swing gate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, grab the swing
gate handle to unlock the swing gate automatically, and
pull the swing gate to open.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
swing gate handle, pushing the Passive Entry lock button
will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using any Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted
Ú page 381.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer
for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or mechanical key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel),
lower the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to
check that there is no one left inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door rein-
stall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-road
driving tips, see
Ú page 178.
When front doors are removed, the message “Blind
Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display in the
instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power
Door Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only. Failure to follow this warning
can result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
Ú page 178.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may cause personal injury in the event of an
accident.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear
cargo tray located under the rear load floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the
instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along
the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are
detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the
wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into the
open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight downward
on the wiring connector to unplug. Store the wiring
connector in the lower door basket.
1 – Red Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness Lever
1 – Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 – Black Security Tab
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. With the door in the open position, remove the check
bolt from the door check attachment on the bodyside
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
reinstallation. See note below if the check arm gets
pushed into the door while the door is off.
Door Check Arm
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the door,
and lower them into the body hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to assist
in guiding the door into place during installation.
Hinge Pin Locations
2. With the door in the open position, align the door
check bracket with the hole on the bodyside. Insert
the check screw and tighten using a #40 Torx head
driver to 19.9 ft· lb (27.0 N·m).
NOTE:
If the check arm is stuck inside the door, follow these
instructions to install the check arm:
a. Insert the check arm screw into the check arm bracket.
Ensure the screw is in the correct orientation.
b. Slowly pull on the screw to draw the check arm out until
you encounter increased resistance. Do not attempt to
pull the check arm all the way out.
c. While sitting inside the vehicle, hold the door partially
closed and insert the screw into the hole on the body.
d. Using your fingers, turn the screw clockwise at least two
full turns. Gently pull on the screw to ensure it is secure.
e. Using the door handle, slowly push the door open. The
check arm will be pulled out of the door. You may hear
the check arm pop against the screw.
f. Fully tighten the screw as instructed.
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s door into
the harness just inside the vehicle, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring connector
during installation. Close the door slightly to provide more
slack if needed.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring connector
straight
into the wiring harness until the wiring
harness lever starts to lower with the latching pin.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
2. After the harness lever has started to move with the
pressure of seating the wiring connector, continue by
lowering the wiring harness lever to the fully closed
position.
Fully Closed Position
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the metal hook
just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Replace wiring access doors.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
(FOUR-DOOR MODELS)
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring connector into
the harness will result in damage that is not covered by
the New Vehicle Warranty.
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only. Failure to follow this warning
can result in death or serious personal injury.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door rein-
stall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For off-road
driving tips, see
Ú page 178.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear
cargo tray located under the rear load floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This
will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring
connector to be unplugged.
Wiring Connector
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
Ú page 178.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may fly around and cause personal injury or
death in the event of a sudden stop, rough terrain, or
a collision.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
6. With the door in the open position, remove the check
bolt from the door check attachment on the body
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
reinstallation.
Door Check Arm
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior rearview
mirrors can be installed on to the upper body door hinges
after the front doors have been removed.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Door Off Mirror
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front doors
Ú
page 24.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door opening
using a #40 Torx head driver, and store in a safe
location.
Cowl Bolt Location
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
Ú page 178.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may fly around and cause personal injury or
death in the event of a sudden stop, rough terrain, or
a collision.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the A-pillar,
making sure to align the bottom of the bracket with
the upper door hinge, and the hole from the removed
cowl bolt.
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror bracket
(over the cowl bolt hole), then insert the bracket bolt
into the mirror bracket, through the bracket bushing.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the bottom of
the upper door hinge up into the mirror bracket, then
rotate the bracket knob toward the rear of the vehicle
to secure the mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge shoulder
bolt with a #40 Torx head driver. Recommended
torque specification for the bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb
(8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb (10 N·m) for the hinge shoulder
bolt.
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Bracket Bolt
1 — Bracket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror bracket.
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror
assembly, and tighten into the mirror bracket using a
#30 Torx head driver. Recommended torque specifi-
cation for the mirror screws is 4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
Mirror Screw Locations
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp bracket,
the bracket bushing from step 4 is not needed. Use the
spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOOR INSTALLATION —
I
F EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
This vehicle may be equipped with
half-doors. To install the half-doors in
the vehicle, follow the instruction sheet
packaged in the box the doors were
received in. Replacement parts may be
purchased through Mopar® Service.
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For front
door removal, see
Ú
page 24
. For rear door removal,
see
Ú
page 27.
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the lower
half-door, and lower them into the body hinges on the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to assist
in guiding the door into place during installation.
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
CAUTION!
Do not run half-doors through an automatic car
wash. This may result in scratches and wax buildup
on the windows.
Careless handling and storage of the half-doors may
damage the seals resulting in water leaks into the
interior of the vehicle.
The upper half-doors must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door windows
at the upper B-pillar area for both front and rear
doors to avoid damage to the windows when not in
use.
Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper in
temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below. Damage to the
window may occur.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to the
metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower half-door to
the connection just inside the vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is closed
completely.
Front Door Wiring Harness
6. Replace wiring access doors.
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the vehicle, the
lower half-doors will have plugs in the post holes that
must be removed prior to upper half-door installation.
To remove these plugs, proceed as follows:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each plug
of the lower half-door (two on each front and rear
door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the center
of the plug to remove.
8. Making sure the window on the upper half-door is
completely zipped closed, insert the upper half-door
into the lower half-door by placing the posts into the
post holes.
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper half-door
until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Door Latch Alignment
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the striker. DO
NOT adjust the striker, as this could affect the positioning
of the full door.
If the door does not center align between the latch and the
striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the almost
closed position, and check that the latch and striker
align.
3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to close
the door softly and tighten the hinge bolts to
20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb /
37 N·m).
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly set the
door almost to the closing position and check how the
door latch aligns with the body striker. Touch condition
between these components can result in damage to
both the door and the striker.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Door Adjustment
If the door does not latch properly after installation, if
there is interference between the panels, or if a
non-uniform gap around the door is observed when the
door is closed (example: door position appears to be low
and too far rearward), the position of the door on its hinges
may need to be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part of the
door latch, as modifications to these parts will affect
installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved forward
by pushing the door handle toward the front of the
vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing the door handle
and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle body are
uniform around the entire door, tighten the door
hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque:
27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or wind
noise is observed, the seal of the upper half-door to the
door opening may need to be adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be adjusted,
proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size piece of
paper along the top of the door opening against the
vehicle near where the leak/noise was observed.
Make sure half of the paper is above the area where
the door seal contacts the door opening, while the
other half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the paper
upward. If the paper moves with little to no effort, the
upper half-door will need to be adjusted in that area
to increase seal compression.
Performing A Paper Test
There is another optional test that can be performed using
a flashlight and the help of another person.
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move the
flashlight around the periphery of the door seal, shining
outward. The other person should stand outside of the
vehicle and check for light passing by the seal. If light is
seen through the seal area, the door will need to be
adjusted.
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly close
each door to check for body contact. Improper setting of
the door hinges can cause extreme non-uniform
conditions, and result in damage to the body around
the door.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up and
away from the lower half. Lay the upper half-door on
a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not provided),
loosen the nut located inside the bottom of the upper
half-door post, closest to where the “paper test”
detected a gap.
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
3. Using a 3 mm Allen wrench (not provided), rotate the
screw on the side of the post counterclockwise (while
holding the wrench on the loosened bolt) to increase
the seal compression. If needed, rotate clockwise to
reduce seal compression.
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post using
the wrench and make sure the screw head is flush to
the post. Reinstall the upper half-door.
Screw Head Flush To Post
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”. Repeat
the adjustment procedure if needed.
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower half-door
pocket to seal the upper half-door to the roof:
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive side
of the shim and place the shim with pencil into the
pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the pocket,
and remove the pencil once the shim is firmly in
place.
1 — 3 mm Allen Wrench
2 — 8 mm Open-End Wrench
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the front
upper corner of the rear doors, deformation of the seal will
occur.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation steps in
reverse order.
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward firmly
on the middle of the upper half-door until the posts detach
from the lower half.
Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half Door To Remove
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located on
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
(Continued)
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Climate or Comfort screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or backward, depending on the direction you
would like the seatback to move. Release the strap when
the desired position is reached and the seatback will lock
into place.
Recline Strap
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard side of
the front driver seat. Rotate the control forward to
increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of
lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Knob
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two
Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, and slide the entire seat
forward.
Easy Entry Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
(Continued)
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.
NOTE:
The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to its original position.
The recline strap and easy entry lever should not be
used during the automatic returning of the seat to its
sitting position.
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT —
F
OUR DOOR MODELS
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
The center head restraints must be in the lowest posi-
tion to avoid contact with the center console when
folding the seat.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each upper
outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two
release levers folds down the seat and the head restraint
simultaneously. The smaller lever folds down the head
restraint independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever and
slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint will fold
automatically with the seat when this lever is pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then, raise the
head restraint until it locks into place. If interference from
the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking,
you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR SEAT —
T
WO DOOR MODELS
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on the back
of the rear seat and two corresponding wire loops
located on the back of each B-pillar. Open the
hook-and-loop fastener on the strap and thread
through the wire loop. Fold the hook-and-loop
fastener over to keep the seat in the folded position.
This should be done on both sides.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
2. To return the seat to its normal upright position,
reverse these steps.
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the rear seat
latches.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully
latched.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
(Continued)
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting
on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear
armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap
under the head restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli-
sion.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but
foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release
strap located on the upper outboard side of each rear
seat.
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Locations
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing, see
Ú page 261.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the inner
release lever, located on the upper part of the rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the release
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and pull
upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release button while
pushing downward on the head restraint. For information
on child seat tether routing, see
Ú page 261.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat down.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR
button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 381.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, And Climate Functions
3 — Push To End Call
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
Outside Rearview Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 54.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Switch
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 381.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, refer to the following steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 48. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some US gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to
your HomeLink® buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine if the new device
you want to program the HomeLink® button to has a
rolling code or a non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission
– which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all channels
will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates when the
engine is running for security reasons associated with
removable tops and doors.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights, and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light
operation.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Fog Light Switch
3 — Dimmer Control
1 — Headlight Control
2 — Fog Light Switch
3 — Dimmer Control
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights are active when the low
beams are not on, and the engine is running. DRLs may be
deactivated by applying the parking brake.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. The lever will
return to the centered position. To return the headlights to
low beam, pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or
push the lever toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams through the use
of a camera mounted on the vehicle’s header. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto High
Beam” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184, as
well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion and placing the multifunction lever in the high
beam position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound when the driver’s door is opened.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking lights
or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch.
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are
opened, by rotating the dimmer controls on the headlight
switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of the
vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light
and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will
cause all the interior lights to turn off. This allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
DIMMER CONTROL
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Rotating the dimmer control will
also adjust the interior and ambient light levels (e.g.
courtesy lights in the footwell, illuminated cupholders, and
front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first
detent position for one of four intermittent settings. The
delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate
for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released.
Then, the intermittent interval previously selected will
resume.
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and
the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will
operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will
turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the washer will resume normal operation.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off-road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long
as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 326.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER —
I
F EQUIPPED
A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield
wiper/washer lever controls the operation of the rear
wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the instrument
panel to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump and wiper will continue to operate as
long as the lever is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the washer will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return to the
parked position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper
will resume function at whichever position the switch is set
at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C to turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
The A/C button allows the operator to manually activate or
deactivate the A/C system. When the A/C system is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press and
release the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or
push the button on the faceplate. AUTO will
achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the blower speed
and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active
during AUTO operation to improve performance. AUTO
mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press
and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO
indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this
function will cause the system to switch between manual
mode and automatic mode
Ú page 59.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button
on the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Climate Control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. There are
seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the
blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. The blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the
touchscreen or press the Mode button on the
faceplate to adjust the airflow distribution. The
airflow distribution can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to the MAX
A/C setting to change the current setting to the
coldest output of air. Moving the temperature
control knob away from the MAX A/C setting
causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the faceplate
to change the system between recirculation
mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped)
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is
not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if equipped),
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the Defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air
forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the
temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the
temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases
the heating temperature and turning the temperature
control knob counterclockwise decreases the heating
temperature.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Climate Control system.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The blower
speeds increase as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the blower
control knob to the OFF (O) position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable
feature within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 359.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
The following chart is for Manual Override Operation.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower storage
compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch.
To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom
latch.
Console Storage Latches
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set the
mode control to (Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode) and turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging
starts to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Upper Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is located
underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cargo
strap/handle at the rear of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Cover (Four Door Models)
Rear Storage Cover (Two Door Models)
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Controls
Ú page 53.
USB/AUX CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel, below
the climate controls. Behind the media hub access door,
the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a Type C USB port
and one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow you to
play music from MP3 players, smartphones or USB
devices through the vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if
equipped. For further information, refer to Android Auto™
or Apple Carplay®
Ú page 222 or in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C
and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the
same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
playing media. When both Type C and Type A
charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at
a reduced rate.
Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to play music from USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are located
behind the center console, above the power inverter. Both
ports are charge only.
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the USB
ports, the following message may display depending on
the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets that
can provide power for accessories designed for use with
the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
second power outlet located in the rear cargo area and is
powered directly from the vehicle’s battery.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device while
driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision.
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery
powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC
position)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 W, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of
the instrument panel can be used to power various
electrical devices. You have the ability to configure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 184.
All switches can be configured as follows:
Switch type operation: Latching or Momentary
Power source: Battery or Ignition
Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On or Off
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is
set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four
blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, in the passenger side under the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation
of your electrical devices.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Wire Color Chart
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls. Push the switch
downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
Power Window Switches
To open the window part way (manually), push the window
switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger
window, and the lower right switch controls the right rear
passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear of the
center console for the rear passenger windows in the
four-door model.
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power and the passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down to the second detent and release,
and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, rotate the switch downward. To
enable the window controls, rotate the switch upward.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the
front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
WRANGLER TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the
necessary tools required for the operations described in
the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for
easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used inde-
pendently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at the same time.
Provided Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four door
models only), the soft top system will be provided in a
separate box located in the rear of the vehicle for shipping
purposes only.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP INTO
S
UNRIDER® POSITION
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult
to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the
vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed.
If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
WARNING!
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the elements.
Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an acci-
dent. Remember, always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft tops.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause
serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle
and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or fully
lowered.
Do not fully lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
For important information on cleaning and caring for
your vehicle's fabric top
Ú page 361.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water
damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak
into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION!
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Two Door Side View Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Two And Four Door Rear Components
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
NOTE:
All lowering and raising the soft top instructions are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and appear-
ance of two door model components may differ.
The following options are available to you when lowering
your vehicle’s soft top:
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter windows
installed
Sunrider® position with rear and quarter panels
removed
Sunrider® position with rear window installed and
quarter panels removed
Fully lowered position with rear and quarter windows
removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and installed
together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1
Bow of the soft top to start the operation.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link
to fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider®
position.
Step Four
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position, secure the
top by using the two hook-and-loop fasteners provided in
the center console.
Step Four
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® position
with the rear window and quarter panel assemblies
fully installed or completely removed.
The rear window and rear quarter windows
must be
removed before fully lowering the soft top to prevent
damage to the top. Clean the side and rear windows
before removal to assist in preventing scratching
during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers
are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean
them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through an authorized
dealer.
Removing The Soft Top Windows
NOTE:
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear window and rear
quarter windows
must be removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s
plastic retainers from the lower right and left
corners.
Step One
2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and
upward releasing it from both the right and left
retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the swing
gate bar to the left separating it from the rear window.
Store in soft window bag (if equipped), or a safe
location.
Step Three
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter
window pillars.
Step Four
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left
until it is completely separate from its retainer.
Do not
pull downward while removing the rear window.
Damage to the retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner
outward and release tab from the bottom of the
window pillar.
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at the upper
front corner of each quarter window.
Step Two
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic
retainer from along the bottom of the window moving
toward the front of the vehicle.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top of
the front window.
Step Four
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it
is completely separate from its retainer.
Do not pull
downward while removing the window. Damage to
the retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a safe
location.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag, refer to the
next section.
Soft Top Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear quarter
windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear window,
does not store in the soft window storage bag (if
equipped).
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both fabric
dividers downward and lay the first quarter window
all the way to the right side with the inside of the
window facing downward and the window pillar to
the outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on the inside
of the window pillar.
Step One
Step One
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first quarter
window.
Step Two
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the first
divider all the way to the left side with the inside of the
window facing downward and the window pillar to the
outside.
Step Three
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the second
quarter window.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second divider.
Step Five
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Step Six
Lowering The Soft Top All The Way
1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel windows
Ú
page 72.
2. From the Sunrider® position
Ú page 67, remove
straps if previously secured and move to the rear of
the vehicle.
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6 Bow of
the soft top on the left side.
Step Three
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft top
to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the
stowed position.
Step Four
5. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “lock” position.
Step Five (Locked Position)
6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position, push
downward on each side of the folded soft top to
ensure it is secure. An audible “click” may be heard.
Step Six
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fasteners
provided in the center console.
Step Six
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the Soft Top or vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully
Lowered Position
1. From the fully lowered position,
remove straps if previously
secured.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the
lock lever on the left and right side lift assist
mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Step Two
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide
track until it locks into the Sunrider® position with an
audible “click”.
Step Three
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top
is locked in the Sunrider® position.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward
the front of the vehicle manually guiding the top into
the closed position.
Step Five
Step Five
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Repeat on the other side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Seven
Installing The Soft Top Windows
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the
window into the retainer and slide forward while
keeping the window level. Repeat on the other side.
Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top
cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps could
result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the windows,
ensuring they are fully engaged, followed by the
retainers along the bottom of the windows.
Step Three
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged before the
vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front
corner of each quarter window by pressing firmly.
Step Four
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to
right while keeping the window level.
Step One
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers at the
bottom of the window from left to the right.
Step Two
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side
retainers.
Step Three
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Line up the rear window to the right side quarter
window first, and engage the plastic retainers.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right
and left corners.
Step Six
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer to the next
section.
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top
Ú
page 75.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both the left
and right sides are in the “lock” position, and an
audible “click” is heard when pushing down on the #1
bow from each of the lift assist mechanisms before
removing.
Step Two
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,
unscrew the two Torx head screws on each lift assist
mechanism, then lift the mechanism up and away
from the vehicle.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to
release the side link from the track.
Step Four
Step Four
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away from
the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport bar,
trim, and tire carrier. Store the soft top in a safe,
clean, and dry location.
Step Six
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,
unscrew the Torx screw on both rear corners of the
vehicle, removing the retainers.
Step Seven
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
Ú
page 87.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front, followed
by the rear on each side. For instructions and
appropriate torque specifications for the door rail
Torx screws
Ú page 96.
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the rear of
the vehicle using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet. Refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx screws. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the “lock”
position, lift the soft top into the rear of the vehicle
with the side links pointing toward the front. Lower
the lift assist mechanisms onto its retainers on both
sides (on the inside of the sport bar).
Step Four
Step Four
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,
tighten the Torx screws by turning them clockwise.
Secure them until they are snug (refer to the following
table for recommended torque specifications), being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Repeat on the opposite side.
Step Five
Torque
Specification For
Torx Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Torque
Specification For
Torx Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
(Continued)
2
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail
rearward, place the side link into the guide track on
the top of the rail then release the lever.
Step Six
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
8. Raise the soft top
Ú page 77.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not
tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires,
building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.
For optional Mopar® accessory roof racks
Ú page 102.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body side or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door
or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Two Door Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All hard top removal and installation instructions are
applicable to both two and four door model vehicles.
Images shown are of four door models, and appear-
ance of two door model components may differ.
The left side panel must be removed before removing
the right side panel.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed as follows:
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking
them from the roof.
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the
top of the windshield.
Step Three
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the previous steps to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag —
If Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to store
your hard top panels. The storage bag contains two
compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so the loops
and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back
the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting the
panel into the panels bag.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting the
panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag closed.
Step Four
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with the
hooks and straps facing the back of the rear seat.
Attach the clip at the bottom of the bag to the child
restraint anchorage, located at the base of the rear
seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints
and loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the
strap to tighten the Freedom Top bag securely
against the rear seat.
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Unlatched Position
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
I
NSTALLATION
1. Open the header latch inside the vehicle, and the
three L-shaped locks on each panel.
2. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with
the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole
followed by the left side panel, making sure there is
no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clear of any dust and debris prior to reinstal-
lation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
1. Remove both front panels
Ú
page 83.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,
remove the two Torx head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the front
doors).
Step Three
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside —
three screws on each side) using the #50 Torx head
driver.
Step Four
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance
of the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
Step Five
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the left
rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Six
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.
Step Seven
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab inward
while pulling downward to disconnect.
Step Eight
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the release button
on hose connector, and pull downward.
Step Nine
10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by plugging
it into the receptacle and reengaging the locking tab.
Step Ten
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into the top of
the body side receptacle.
Step Eleven
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Step Eleven
12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.
13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they
must be removed prior to installation of the hard top. For
removal procedures, see
Ú page 95.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top. Then follow the
removal steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body
should be torqued as follows using the provided
#50 Torx head driver and ratchet:
Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
(13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD TOP
The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the Hard
Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy opening of the
area above the driver and front passenger seats.
Sunrider® For Hard Top
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
Ú
page 83.
2. With the help of a second person, set the Sunrider®
top onto the top of the vehicle making sure to align
the holes at the front and rear of the side rails.
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
CAUTION!
The removal of the rear Hard Top requires four adults,
one located on each corner. Failure to follow this
caution could damage the Hard Top.
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while driving.
Operating the top while driving could cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning
may result in serious injury or death.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt without spacer) from underneath. Tighten with a
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt with spacer) from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the front and
rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb (12 N·m).
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear clamp
attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until snug.
Rear Clamp Location
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear clamp
attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the Sunrider®
top forward using the integrated handle on the front
header of the top. Manually guide the top into the
closed position.
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place. Repeat on the
other side.
Engage Both Header Latches
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
Release Both Header Latches
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and push the
top rearward to the Sunrider® position.
Sunrider® Position
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and wrap
one around the side rails on each side of the
Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to the
right of the driver’s side sun visor.
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
The power top is non-removable. If desired, the rear
quarter windows can be removed and stored in the
provided storage bag
Ú page 93.
The power top will not open in temperatures below
-4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a higher
temperature, it can be closed at temperatures above
-40°F (-40°C).
The power top will not operate at vehicle speeds above
60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when opening and
closing the Power Sliding Top as a result of the Uconnect
system switching between power top Closed and power
top Open audio modes.
Opening And Closing The Power Top
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will open automatically from
any position. The power top will open fully and stop
automatically.
Push the close switch and release it within one-half
second and the power top will close automatically from
any position. The power top will close fully and stop
automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other movement of the power top switch will stop the
power top.
Manual Open/Close
To open the power top manually, push and hold the open
switch to the full open position, then release.
To close the power top manually, push and hold the close
switch to the fully closed position, then release.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the power top movement. The top will remain in a
partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the power top during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the power top is detected, the
power top will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the close switch and
release to Express Close.
NOTE:
The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if closing
during a severe headwind. If this occurs, push and hold
the Power Sliding Top switch again to close the top
completely.
If three consecutive power top close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the power top must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the quarter window glass panel. For important information
on cleaning and caring for your vehicle
Ú page 360.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power top while operating the
power top switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open power top. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the power top.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the power top opening.
Injury may result.
WARNING!
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the top’s
path before closing.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in Accessory Delay
for up to approximately 10 minutes after the vehicle’s
ignition is placed to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 184.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the power top when
the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset the power top,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and start the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds. This
will put the power top into calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button while the top
goes fully open and then back to fully close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed
position, release the close button. The power top is
now reset and ready to use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during the
relearning process, the relearn may not be complete, and
the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the rear
quarter windows can be removed. To remove these
windows, follow this procedure:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two on each
window) on the interior of the windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch
clockwise to release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch
counterclockwise to
release.
Step Five
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each window
upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the windows after
the latches are released. Damage could result to the pins
holding the windows in place.
Step Six
Step Six
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided
storage bag and keep in a safe location, or securely
fasten the bag to the rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter windows,
proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the fabric divider
raised, place the first quarter window with the
latches facing outward into the foam insert. Fold
divider over the window once placed inside.
Step One
2. Place the second window into the foam insert with the
latches facing outward. Fully close the bag.
NOTE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the outside
of the windows will be facing each other with all latches
facing the outside of the bag.
Step Two
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo area
of the vehicle by securing the bag in the vehicle’s
cargo area. This is done by attaching the straps at the
top of the bag to the rear head restraints, as well as
attaching the clip at the bottom of the bag to the
forward most cargo hook on the load floor.
Step Three
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing Out-
ward)
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
WARNING!
In a collision, unsecured rear quarter windows in the
vehicle could cause injury. They could fly around in a
sudden stop or rough terrain and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the rear quarter windows in the
vehicle without securing them as instructed here.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
DOOR FRAME
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx screws located on the
underside of each door frame (two per door).
Door Frame Screw Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by
pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as they are
held in place by an internal mechanism.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
Step Three
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is
wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame (four door
models).
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR
D
OOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at
the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the
Torx head screws (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate torque
specifications for the door rail screws.
Step Three
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the
body side, just behind the rear door opening.
Step Four
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear of the front door rail, making sure rubber seals lie
flat. Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid
water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Door
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
door frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection
that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Target Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
(Continued)
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the previous table for the appropriate torque
specifications for the door rail screws.
Insert Screws From Below Frame
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION TWO DOOR
M
ODELS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal
at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for
the Torx head screws (two for each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail,
and insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate torque
specifications for the door rail screws.
Step Two
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide some protection in some
accidents. The windshield also provides some protection
against weather, road debris and intrusion of small
branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be
folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its
removal is completed and before you return to on-road
driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat
belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of
whether the windshield is raised or folded down.
Target Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
79.6 in-lb
(9 N·m)
87.6 in-lb
(9.9 N·m)
71.7 in-lb
(8.1 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws
if they are overtightened.
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in
vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage
will occur to the top as well as the header seal.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against
personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all
times when the windshield is down.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, the top
MUST be lowered, and the door rails must be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, the
Freedom Panels
MUST be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
Refer to the following instructions for more infor-
mation:
• Soft Top Lowering
Ú page 75
• Door Frame
Ú page 95
• Freedom Top Panels
Ú page 83
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the
windshield.
Step Five
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded
holes and tighten for safekeeping.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for
raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding
windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and
tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle
from providing you and your passengers’ protection
in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may
cause personal injury.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the
vehicle’s header seal.
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down on either side of the hood and
on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure
the windshield in place.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover that
is to be used whenever the windshield is folded down in
order to protect the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sensor. To install the
cover, follow these instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers
the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the wind-
shield to the normal position. Store the cover in the cargo
area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a
microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and
inside cover, being careful not to damage or scratch the
module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, reinstall the
four Torx screws located along the interior of the
windshield. Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the
blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while holding
the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and
tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten.
Repeat for the other arm.
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could
result.
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex
bolts and push gently until they snap into place.
Step Five
6. After completing the steps above:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, reinstall
the Door Rails and raise the top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, rein-
stall the Freedom Panels.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood slightly, and place a hand palm-side down
in the center of the hood opening. Locate the safety latch
in the middle, and push the latch to the right to open.
Place Hand In Hood Opening
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert it into
the radiator crossmember.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
You may have to push down slightly on the hood before
pushing the safety latch.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the slot
and replace it on the hood panel retaining clip. Lower the
hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using one of the
following methods:
Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if equipped)
Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
Power door unlock switch on the front doors (if
equipped)
Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped)
To open the swing gate, pull on the handle.
Swing Gate Handle
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close
the swing gate (hard top models only).
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may require
cleaning if a squeak can be heard when opening the swing
gate. Progressive accumulation of dirt or debris on the
check strap arm may cause failure of the check strap,
requiring replacement. For further information on vehicle
cleaning procedures, see
Ú page 362.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flip-up window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear
flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops (Four Door Models)
Cargo Tie-Down Loops (Two Door Models)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be
uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying anything on your roof or roof
rack.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
appropriately secure the load and any protective
layer placed between the load and the roof surface.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
2
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
3.
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 108.
4.
Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side
of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is
located.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You
can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the
OK arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illumi-
nate in black under normal conditions, yellow for non
critical warnings and red for critical warnings
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus avail-
able, the position within the submenus is shown here
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages and warning or information messages. These
pop-up messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most
of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as
the condition that activated it remains active) and can
be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn
Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Exam-
ples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the
vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the igni-
tion is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type
are “Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press
Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On”.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Messages include the following, but not limited to:
NOTE:
Certain messages may require dealer service.
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Oil Change Due ACC Override
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Fuel Low Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Shifter
Traction Control Off Service Electronic Throttle Control Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Washer Fluid Low Service Power Steering Service Tire Pressure System
Oil Pressure Low Cruise Off Park Brake Engaged
Oil Level Low – If Equipped Cruise Ready Brake Fluid Low
Engine Temperature Hot Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Service Air Bag System Service Air Bag Warning Light Door Open
Doors Open Hood Open Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
Liftgate Open Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Service Transmission
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left or
right arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the
OK button to select
or reset the resettable submenus.
Off Road
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front wheel
angle from the steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text
message (connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the
graphic with the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch
and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the
graphic will be greyed out. A message indicating the
necessary speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC
systems.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Speedometer
Driver Assist — If
Equipped
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Audio
Off Road Trip Info Messages
Screen Setup
Phone Call
Status — If
Equipped
Tire Pressure
Single Gauge
Submenu — If
Equipped
Critical Level
Logic — If
Equipped
Oil Life
Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Level — If
Equipped
Coolant
Temperature
Oil Pressure Oil Temperature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission
Only
Battery Voltage
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering
wheel), and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Ú page 152.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to
reset average fuel economy feature.
Toggle
left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi
or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in
the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles
(16 kilometers), the Range display will change to a
“LOW” message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to
the vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a new
Range value will display. Range cannot be reset
through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the
left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The screen will display the
Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
When no messages are present, a “No Stored Messages”
will display.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on
the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off
Odometer — If Equipped
Show
Hide
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Cancel
Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press
OK
button to choose show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Phone Call Status — If Equipped
A pop-up message for an incoming call will appear on any
screen within your instrument cluster. The pop-up
message will appear on your screen until it is cleared out
of the call is ignored, answered, or the calling ends.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Settings can be programmed to turn the
pop-up off. This will not affect the audio menu or any
phone status information
Ú page 184.
Any incoming calls, active calls, and outgoing calls will
take the place of your audio information.
A caller’s name will only be displayed if:
A number is associated with the call. The phone
number will be displayed in place of the caller’s name.
The test/font of the name is not supported by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster will not
display anything in place of the name.
The caller’s name exceeds the maximum number of
characters. The last two to three digits that will fit will
be replaced with “...”.
NOTE:
Any audio information will return to the instrument cluster
once the call has ended.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
Upper Left and Right
None
Current Econ (or
L/100km, km/L)
Average Econ (or
L/100km, km/L)
Outside Temp Compass Trip A Distance
Range To Empty Time Trip B Distance
Center
None Compass Time
Outside Temp
Average Econ (or
L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Range to Empty Audio Speedometer
Current Econ (or
L/100km, km/L)
Trip B Distance Menu Title
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Stop/Start Vehicle Info
Off Road – If
Equipped
(show/hide)
Messages
Driver Assist – If
Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Screen Setup
Trip Info
(Show/Hide)
Audio
(show/hide)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 117.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of the charging
system. The charging system is still functioning prop-
erly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
DIESEL DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages display in the instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent
Speeds to Clear
Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required – See Dealer
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service Required See
Dealer
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue
Driving
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated
into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to
allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional
maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. Refer to
the following messages that may be displayed on your
instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent
Speeds to Clear — This message will be displayed if the
exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short
duration and low speed driving cycles, your diesel
engine and exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to cleanse the filter to
remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust
Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
Remedy” message will be displayed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition. By simply driving your vehicle at
highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy
the condition in the particulate filter system and allow
your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system
to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and
restore the system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue
Driving — This message indicates that the DPF is
self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving condition
until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — This
message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear
one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust System Service Required — See Dealer — This
messages indicates regeneration has been disabled
due to a system malfunction. At this point the engine
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) will register a fault
code, the instrument panel will display a Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL).
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer — This
message indicates the PCM has derated the engine to
limit the likelihood of permanent damage to the
after-treatment system. If this condition is not
corrected and a dealer service is not performed, exten-
sive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To
correct this condition it will be necessary to have your
vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil
and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles (0 kilo-
meters) remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter
from performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly result
in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine
power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct
this condition.
FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following chart contains a list of different messages
that may appear in the instrument cluster, depending on
different system or fuel conditions. Use the descriptions to
interpret what the message means and determine the
best action to take.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
The engine may be switched off even if the warning
light is on: repeated interruptions of the regeneration
process could cause an early deterioration of engine oil.
For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the
symbol to go off before turning off the engine, following
the previously mentioned instructions. Do not complete
the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is
stopped.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
Ú page 146.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 300.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a chime
will sound, to indicate low engine oil pressure.
If the light and chime turn on while driving,
safely stop the vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure Warning
Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated,
turn the engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the
cause is corrected. If the light is no longer illuminated, the
engine can be operated but it is recommended to take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 261.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire. If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
“CLUTCH HOT” message is displayed, or the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated,
you could cause the clutch to overheat and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure. If you
continue to operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH
HOT” message is displayed, or the Transmission
Temperate Warning Light is illuminated, you could
cause the clutch to overheat and cause severe clutch
damage, transmission damage, or failure.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0
gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is
added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 314.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate along with a
dedicated message on the display (if equipped)
if an unknown fluid not conforming with
acceptable characteristics is inserted, or if an
average consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will appear
on the instrument cluster display whenever a certain
threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to
start the engine.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the
AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a continuous dedicated
message will appear on the instrument panel,
accompanied by a chime.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service
Ú page 152.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 255.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Cruise Control system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in
the sway bar disconnect system
Ú page 145.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoid-
ing sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs,
repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after-
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inopera-
ble. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 140.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Four-Wheel Drive part time mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front and/or rear
axle locker fault has been detected.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 255.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both
axles have been locked. The telltale will display
the lock icon on the front and rear axles to
indicate the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Neutral mode.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated Ú page 140.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected
Ú page 145.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN position. Its duration
may be longer based on colder operating
conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no
longer displayed
Ú page 126.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start Indicator Light may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue®
(UREA) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive
AdBlue® (UREA) indicator light illuminates
when the AdBlue® (UREA) level is low.
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at
least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of AdBlue® (UREA).
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range of
AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you may need
to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate
when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If
this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage, and please see an authorized
dealer.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise
Control is set and there is no vehicle in front
detected
Ú page 152.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 152.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Four-Wheel Drive auto mode. The system
will provide power to all four wheels and shift
the power between the front and rear axles as needed.
This will provide maximum traction in dry and slippery
conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 151.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 50.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but not
set.
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Two-Wheel Drive High mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is
turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may
cause severe damage to the injection system and
irregular engine operation. If the indicator light is
illuminated, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to bleed the system. If the indicator comes on
immediately after refuelling, water, or AdBlue® UREA
has probably been poured into the tank: switch the
engine off immediately and contact an authorized
dealer.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the vehicle is in
4WD Low and push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter Selec-Speed
Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Control
has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Control
has been turned on, but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection
port to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 184.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
3
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start
regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The 4L Indicator Light will
illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into
this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply
the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off while the
ignition will remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF
position). Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/
STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position
(NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF position after 30 minutes of inactivity if
the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running)
position and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and RUN.
To change the ignition positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is removed
and the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor
detects driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4L.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts. For vehicles equipped with
the ENGINE START/STOP button, press and hold the
brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP
button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after following the “Normal
Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not experience an
extended park condition, as previously defined, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 10 to
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait
10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 298.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 to 15 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
(Continued)
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both inside
and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
intervals. Waiting two minutes between such intervals will
protect the starter from overheating.
NOTE:
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature could
result in evident white smoke. This condition will
disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission gear selector in the
PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The cartridge block heater clips into the engine block near
the water jacket and transfers heat to the coolant. It
requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its use is
recommended for environments that routinely fall below
-10°F (-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not
been running overnight or longer periods and should be
plugged in for two hours prior to start. Its use is required
for cold starts with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE:
The engine block heater and heater cord are
factory-installed options. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater and heater cords are available from an authorized
Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in
preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in ther-
mostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
generated by a warming engine.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position,
key fob is removed from the vehicle and vehicle is
locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start during this
period, please wait at least two minutes for the
starter to cool before repeating start procedure.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO
NOT START engine before you drain the water from
the fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 321.
WARNING!
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING
Observe the instrument cluster lights when starting the
engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible under
very cold conditions. The Wait to Start telltale will be illumi-
nated during the preheat process. When the engine Wait
To Start telltale goes off the engine will automatically
crank.
3. The system will automatically engage the starter to
crank the engine. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has turned
off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating
system. If the instructions in this manual are followed, the
engine should start in all conditions and no type of starting
fluid should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation.
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various
engine temperatures. This is caused by the glow plug
heating system. The number of cycles and the length of
the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
module. Glow plug heater operation can run for several
minutes. Once the heater operation is complete, the
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 321.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
require special considerations. The following charts
suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic
conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD Fuel
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD
Fuel and Number 1 ULSD Fuel which reduces the
temperature at which wax crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump
at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
exhaust system damage
Ú page 371.
If climatized or Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not available,
and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained
arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treat-
ment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct engine oil
viscosity
Ú page 374.
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially
during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped
with four flaps for managing total grille opening in varying
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used, the flaps should be in the full open
position to allow air flow to the cooling module and
automatic transmission oil cooler. When ambient
temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need
to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover is available
from a Mopar® dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When
starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating
speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the
engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine
at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are
applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may be
harmful to your engine because combustion chamber
temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn
completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head valves, and
injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the
crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the
engine.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the
turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run after the
engine is turned off. These conditions are under high load
and high temperature conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
To reduce the potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take
the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE:
If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C will auto-
matically turn off.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut down the engine as soon as
possible. A chime will sound when the light turns on. After
the vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure
Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and
contact an authorized dealer for further assistance. If the
lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine can be operated
but it is recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could result
in immediate and severe engine damage.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail.
Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and
visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some
important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
the engine operating temperature
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 374.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
The diesel engine does not require a break-in period due
to its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing
the following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
tors.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying
or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load
operation will extend the time before the engine is at full
efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen
at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For
recommended viscosity and quality grades see
Ú page 374. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light
will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE
or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on or partially
depressing the clutch pedal. Never attempt to hold
the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged. Operating vehicle in this manner may
cause the clutch to overheat and cause permanent
damage to the clutch. If you continue to operate the
vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT” message
or Transmission Temperature Warning Light will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. For more infor-
mation
Ú page 116.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is
normal.
Transmission Gear Selector
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear selector into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on
the handle of the selector). The engaged gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the
gear selector all the way left and then forward.
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal.
This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is
idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal
released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, over time
could lead to premature wear of the gearbox internal
components.
CAUTION!
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmission shift system is equipped with
gear blockers, which will prevent downshifts into FIRST or
SECOND gear above certain vehicle speeds.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip,
and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal pressed may result damage to the
clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing
the clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/
or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
pressed could result in clutch damage.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in
the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú
page 140.
Transmission Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it
is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position should be used for all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 140. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
enables full manual control of transmission shifting also
known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 140.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 176.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 303.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to assess the condition of your trans-
mission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The
current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the
gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift
the transmission.
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear
(or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND
or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will down-
shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not
active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four positions:
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
4H — Four-Wheel Drive High Range
N (Neutral)
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 176.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such as
hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H
and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting into 4H or
4L
Ú page 141.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pres-
sures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle
is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE
or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to
the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
4H AUTO — Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range
4H PART TIME — Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range
N (Neutral)
4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the following:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will
be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss
of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road
surfaces only.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle
Ú page 176.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the
two-wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive position
(4H AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode can be
used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2H mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L
positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H
and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting into 4H or
4L
Ú page 143.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed
would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting
the transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pres-
sures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle
is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE
or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to
the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to
both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential
automatically proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
R
EAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L.
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illuminate),
push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle is
locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or
unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked
or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L, or
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY —
I
F EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper conditions
are met.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H.
The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
Ú page 146.
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
Ú page 246.
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or tight
cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4H,
Off Road+ is turned off by the driver, ESC “Full Off” is
exited, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully
locked or unlocked.
The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily disengage the
rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as
soon as the system allows.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows
greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located
on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or
4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
position
Ú page 140. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left
and right suspension height differences. This condition is
due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In
order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This
alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances
vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once
again attempt to return to off-road mode.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
OFF ROAD+ Switch
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the OFF ROAD+ switch
in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve
depending on which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is
activated.
NOTE:
Off Road+ will not function in 2H mode. If the button is
pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster display will show the
message “Off Road+ Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When Off Road+ is active, the following features will
activate:
The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster display
A mode-specific message will display the instrument
cluster display
Off-Road Pages will launch on the radio head-unit if
selected in radio settings
The Off-Road Camera will launch if selected in radio
settings
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave in
different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use. The
following enhancements will occur when using Off Road+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule when
rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-gain and
low range, operates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
Off Road+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand
performance/wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited
speed
Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will not
function while using Off Road+. A dedicated cluster
message will display indicating this if either feature is
activated while in Off Road+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+, the
following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will turn
off, but Stability Control will remain active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Control will turn off.
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic Power
Steering system that provides increased vehicle response
and ease of maneuverability. The system adapts to
different driving conditions. If the Electro-Hydraulic Power
Steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing power steering assist, then the system will
provide mechanical steering capability.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road mode,
the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the instrument
cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a discon-
nected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of
vehicle control, which could result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically
driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and a
flashing icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance
Ú page 108.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over
and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns
off
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles
equipped with eTorque contain a heavy-duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric battery to store
energy from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
after a stop as well as providing launch torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/
START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 108.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal pressed.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start screen. Situations when the engine will not
stop include (but not limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
Gear selector is in MANUAL (M) mode.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models Only).
ACC is on and speed is set.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
System fault is present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section, and the autostop
function will be disabled
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 108.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is designed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal will
automatically restart the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles
equipped with eTorque contain a heavy duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric battery to store
energy from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
after a stop as well as providing launch torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled during
off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver
ignition start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY
until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 108.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and
the clutch pedal must be fully released.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Situations when the engine will not stop include (but not
limited to):
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C).
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
Battery is discharged.
When driving in REVERSE.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver’s door is open.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Forward Gear is engaged.
Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models Only).
System fault is present.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
previously listed items.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start
when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require
complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/
START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted higher.
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 108.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/
Start system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off, the
engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the
ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 108.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF
position erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not
equipped with ACC
Ú page 151.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 381.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, will
bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the
vehicle ahead does not start moving within two
seconds, the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in FIRST gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When ESC Full Off mode is active
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the
ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the
ACC system cannot be set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in FIRST gear.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated)
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual transmission
only)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES button
and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will
cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road condi-
tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or deceler-
ate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, your vehicle
will release the brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
With Target Light. The system will then adjust vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages
Ú page 154
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, your vehicle will
resume motion without the need for any driver action if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
“SERVICE ACC/FCW” WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no vehicle in front detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). For limitations of this
system and recommendations, see
Ú page 163.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system's
operating speed, a warning will appear within the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 108. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the Park Assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show a single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and emit a fast sound
tone that will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when
the system is sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 108 will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD Low).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
remain on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle in the center of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Park-
Sense.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen X button to disable display of the Rear View
Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu,
and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph
(13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows
you to you see an on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
CAUTION!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings that may
be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 184.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below methods:
Press the FWD Camera button on the controls screen.
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the apps
menu.
Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road Pages.
Press the Off Road+ button when “Auto Launch Off
Road+” (if equipped) has been selected under camera
settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned off and TrailCam view is active, the TrailCam
mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to disable
display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer
for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the touch-
screen X button, the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button located on the
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop
when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a time
while holding the button.
The Clean Camera system is not available when wind-
shield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic tire lines are projected on
the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
steering wheel position.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow excess fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is prop-
erly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being
filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations and
may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow excess fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler door.
NOTE:
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause
severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper
maintenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is
essential see
Ú page 321.
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the
stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with water
will promote the growth of “microbes.” These microbes
form “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system and
lines. Drain condensation from the supply tank and
change the line filter on a regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, air is
pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start see
Ú page 323.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel
emissions standards required by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx
(oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are harmful
to our health and the environment to a near-zero level. A
small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into
the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when
vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing
to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — DEF Filler
CAUTION!
For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for motor
vehicles in accordance with ASTM D-975 Grade S15
specifications. The use of other products or mixtures
may damage the engine beyond repair and
consequently void the warranty, due to the damage
caused. If you accidentally introduce other types of fuel
into the tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If
the engine has been run for even an extremely limited
amount of time, you must not only drain the fuel tank,
but the rest of the supply circuit as well.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
injection system and a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF Lines
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the
achievement of diesel emission requirements; while
maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability, torque
and power ratings.
For system messages and warnings see
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system.
You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise
from under the vehicle at a stop. This is normal opera-
tion.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine
shutdown to purge the DEF system. This is normal
operation and may be audible from the rear of the
vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable
product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in
temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and 32°C), it
will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For
example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below
12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate
in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF
must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless steel).
Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel
should be avoided as they are subject to corrosion by
DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster display)
will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will
affect the amount of DEF that is used in your vehicle.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 374.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in fuel door).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a
fault related to the DEF system, the gauge may not
update to the new level. See an authorized dealer
for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately update
after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is
below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF tank heater will
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time. Under
very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge
may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in
a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level read-
ings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start refilling and
stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indi-
cates that the DEF tank is full). Do not proceed
with the refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. tanks)
are used for refilling, after the indication appears
on the instrument panel display
Ú page 104 fill
the DEF tank with no more than 2 gal (8 L).
If containers which can be screwed to the filler are
used, the reservoir is full when the DEF level in the
container stops pouring out. Do not proceed
further.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any of the
following happen: DEF stops flowing from the fill
bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill
inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the
DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF
tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however,
if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could
be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with
water and use an absorbent material to soak up the
spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is acciden-
tally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in
severe damage to your engine, including but not
limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other
petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount
of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gal (295 L) will contaminate the entire
DEF system and will require replacement. If owners
use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling the
tank, it should either be new or one that has only
been used for adding DEF. Mopar® provides an
attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 169.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 169.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed between
the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional informa-
tion.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (i.e., the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on
the Tire And Loading Information Placard
Ú page 345.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW
Maximum Trailer TW
(See Note)
2.0L
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.6L
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.0L Diesel Four–Door 8,427 lb (3,822 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 345.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into the vehicle's electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an acci-
dent.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral, auto-
matic transmission must be in PARK, and manual trans-
mission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Shifting Into (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there
is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic
transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in
FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral, the
engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the (N)
Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case (N) Neutral position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case
in (N) Neutral and the engine running. With the transfer
case in (N) Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They
are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed
to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the underside of
the vehicle for each bracket.
Underside Nuts
2. Remove the side step assembly.
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/bumper can
be removed by following the steps below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel fascia/bumpers
only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 Torx bit
screw driver. Do not remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store
it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
(Continued)
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and
maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are
no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights.
Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on
what is safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should
always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving
route while remembering what you are currently driving
over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system and the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if equipped) be
disabled during off-road use.
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional traction
and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or
descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling
power. This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4L.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to
get fresh traction and help maintain your momentum.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE,
with the transfer case in the 4L position to maintain your
momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud hole,
get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L when operating the vehicle on dry
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine
RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may
cause skidding and loss of control.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers
and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going
to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce
your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure
will drastically improve your traction and handling while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires
prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires.
This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The
tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and
make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You
should now be able to drive out following the trench you
just created at a 45-degree angle.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease
the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is
the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on
what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place
a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try
rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are
just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You
should always feel confident with the vehicle and your
abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission
into a lower gear with 4L engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the
front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to
bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you
approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back
straight down the grade using engine resistance along
with the vehicle brakes.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking
to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary,
but do not allow the tires to lock.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be
seriously injured or killed.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. Only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. Tread lightly and avoid damage to the
environment. Know your vehicle's abilities and be able to
recover it if something goes wrong. Never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into
FIRST gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L position
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed of {3
to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep
the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom
of the axle differentials, inspect all of the vehicle fluids for
signs of water ingestion.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters;
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth,
current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering.
This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can
cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or
other vehicle components, and your brakes will be
less effective once wet and/or muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle
downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very
shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in
jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and
vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission
bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
or drowning.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
4
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 377, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the Uconnect 4
With 7-inch Display, and the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at a time
to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu,
press and release the preferred setting option until a
check mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+
This setting will determine how the Off-Road feature is launched through the radio when
turning the vehicle on. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and “Off
Road Pages”.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Setting Name Description
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
Units
Voice
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument cluster
display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are “Speed” (MPH or
km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or
km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP
[UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Show Time in Status Bar/Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
Camera
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options
related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn the Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Lights
Doors & Locks
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach/Illuminated Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams/Automatic High Beam Headlamps This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Interior Ambient Lights on or off.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock/Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start/Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or
off.
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
AUX Switches
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There
are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX switches can
either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type
and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state
conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is set to
Ignition.
After pressing the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Doors On Key Off Power Delay/Doors On Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned on.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay/Doors Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will
increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Projection Manager This setting will activate your smartphone to be projected on the vehicle’s touchscreen.
Setting Name Description
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Info
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
Reset/Restore Settings
System Information
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These
settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or
installing apps.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This setting will display the software licensing information screen.
Map Update
This setting will display different ways to update maps of the radio into your system.
“Download System Information To USB” and “Generate Request Code” will appear as the
two options to select from.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 201.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
system
Ú page 212.
Settings
Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
Compass Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and
steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Ú page 54.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway
so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not
require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are
driving.
When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over and park safely
to do so.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system, mois-
ture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic
device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touch-
screen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions
Ú page 381.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM,
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off
the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the
VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise increases the
volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek
Down button will scan the different frequency bands at
a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related to the
currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back
button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
automatically tune to that station.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for
the beep to say a command. See an example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “
Help”. The system provides you with a list of
commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew
and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM®
at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer
Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US)
or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and
Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds
in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
channel with the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the
chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing
the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert me to
on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score update” or
both when one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
the top of the screen.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can
switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. Press the
All button to view all saved presets. To remove a saved
preset, a new preset must be saved over the old one.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right of
the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button or the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the X
button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected
to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the
setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
song playing.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Mode is
entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the
faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of
the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert a USB
device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit will switch to
USB Mode and begin to play. The display will show the
track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play
will begin at the start of track 1.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen and select
the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 212.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port,
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if
equipped). Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate, selecting the Source button and then the
AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists,
play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio;
use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with
the VOLUME & On/Off control knob, or MUTE button, or
with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device. If
supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of
the browse window shows items and their sub-functions,
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the Browse
button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the device. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: USB.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
to play the selections on the USB device in random order
to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
button
Ú page 201.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or “Show
Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give
a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would like
to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device
button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth® streaming
audio device with the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display radio
Ú page 214.
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the
Uconnect screen.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
“Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
device will take precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook
Ú page 221.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
button or the Settings Gear button next to the
selected number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current
call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
on the Phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
(zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a
command. Here are some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “
Call
John Smith
work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth®
ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/
RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 381.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your Android™
6.0 or higher powered smartphone
with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number
of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto™, perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
plug your device in the app begins to download. Your
vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use the
app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Android Auto™ icon.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communication
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the beep or
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take
you to a desired destination by voice. You can
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides
voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/
(US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canada).
For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work
with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing through
Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media
screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,
and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
is launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the
latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
its best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™,
to activate its VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need
an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an
active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display,
you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
active data plan. You can check which smartphones
are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and
stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,
Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not
work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also
launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the
touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri
on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri
session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or
any third party application installed on your
device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can
also use select third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access Apple®
Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed
in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with
Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within
Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic Bluetooth®
Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for
the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
function. The connected device is unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System — If
Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
messages. However, another device can also be paired to
the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source,
so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched
from the front and center console USB ports.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS button
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending
on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle,
you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons
Ú page 291.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full
potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission
and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 240.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives
GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and
landline communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services require an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery
are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather,
damage to the electrical system or other important
parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the government,
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all
models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
search, map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of
the Vehicle Branded App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use
Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror
Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button
connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care for assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3.
For customers in the United States, select “Customer
Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to
activate services in your vehicle.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial* period
for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to
continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Vehicle Branded App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
steps away from using connected services.
Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to open
the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is not
registered at the dealership, you will have to call the
Customer Care call center from inside your vehicle or
press the in-vehicle registration button. From there,
you will be able to register your vehicle and add your
vehicle’s VIN to your account.
For customers in Canada, register your account via
your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the apps
list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirmation
email. It may take a short time before remote
services will be available, but you will be able to
log into the Vehicle Branded App and the Owner’s
Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up your
four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/
Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Mobile Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist
Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/
en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information you need,
all in one place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos
about your vehicle's features, and easily access your
manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with
the key elements of the website that will help you get the
most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/
Register button and enter your email address and
password.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
“Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in using
your email address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™
account, such as your contact information, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit
Profile button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter your
four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely
start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn
and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can
elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or
E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then
“Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you
can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address
to notify you, and you can customize the types of
messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle
and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS
button to be connected to a call center agent who can
send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible with the device in
your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features
of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
green indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is
placed. The system will verbally alert you that a call
is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call connec-
tion, push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or overhead console or press the Cancel
button on the touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired phone
is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will
go through your mobile device versus the
hands-free system which is not available due to
the SOS Call.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will
NOT work without a network connection compatible
with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
(Continued)
(Continued)
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your
enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, you consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services.
In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency
services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and Canada are
unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS Call
system operation. These include, but are not limited to,
the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is
damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US
or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle must be regis-
tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active
subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces-
sory) position with a properly functioning electrical
system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES WILL
OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
the air bag system may not be working properly and
the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the Rear-
view Mirror Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
WARNING!
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live agent will
contact you through the Uconnect system and alert
emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required for
this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the location
of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case of
an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation before
they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen-
dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular
connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
services for complete service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
from your mobile device. These features include locking/
unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
Branded App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not available
on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (not
available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device
And The Vehicle Branded App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to
go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was
received by your vehicle.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. All occu-
pants should exit the vehicle immediately and move
to a safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
Lock
Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to sound
the horn and activate your
lights.
Unlock
Press this button to unlock
your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to cancel
remote start.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and
password you used when activating your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your
Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to send the
command to by clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands.
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know
if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for
example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you
are unable to lock your vehicle through the Vehicle
Branded App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking
for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote
command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door
Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN
appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM
Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
must be compatible and be connected to an operable
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote
Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights
activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is
on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on your
compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys
and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset
climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down
the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that
has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the
key, the engine will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped
with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
You can set up push notifications every time a command
is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the
last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed and not
triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel,
along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic trans-
mission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must
be started at least once after alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the
Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also
help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any
reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud
and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings
when using this feature. You are responsible for
compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the
location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST button
in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services have been activated, the ASSIST button can
connect you directly to the Customer Care call center (if
equipped). You will be directed to one of the following four
services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need a
tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your
services, renew after your trial has expired, for
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, or help answering any general
questions surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such as
radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will
be presented with your ASSIST options on the
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US
and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces-
sory) position with a properly functioning electrical
system.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to
provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you,
we may record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such
conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle, or via a
landline or mobile device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in
accordance with regulatory requirements. You
acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,
monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any
such call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send the
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After
selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
browse through one of the categories provided, or
type the name or keyword in the search box. You can
also select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
Location information will then be displayed on the
map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the location
of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make
finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over your
private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your
private network access the Web — great for working
and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the
vehicle passengers with an internet access
hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow
Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The
trial can be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button
and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
AT&T portal to get set up.
3.
For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care
agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change
its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot
App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can
also view the connected devices from the app screen by
pressing the View Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order
to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more infor-
mation on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit https://
myvehicle.att.com.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work
with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that
your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by
your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded
the Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to make
the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the
law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen
vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with
your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You
will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you
should also contact your insurance company to
inform it of the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
through which a summary of the performance of your
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
This is provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
the features and applications in this vehicle when it is
safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving in serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the
Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit
vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as
your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s
location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle,
and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you
enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you
cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to
deactivate your Connected Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private
policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
with Connected Services. If you have concerns about the
operation, function or performance of your vehicle, please
take it to an authorized dealer. This report does not
replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check the
instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in your
vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health information.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For further
information, go to your Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
activate services. During this process you will be asked to
provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when
services are needed, or to alert you of other important
information, such as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss
the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages
mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen
messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and
remotely access key services and features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you
can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help,
or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, ask
<brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name>
with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my
<vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM
Guardian™
Ú page 226.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon
Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will
be the same user name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. There will be additional settings to confirm
on the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and keep tabs
on your car. Google Assistant is available across your
devices, including Android™ phones, iPhone® devices, or
voice-activated speakers, like Google Home. If you need
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a complete list of
commands by saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for
help with my car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle
name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level
of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google Assistant,
follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant app on
your smart phone from the App Store® or Google
Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant app
with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by pressing
the icon in the upper right-hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left corner of
the screen. Enter the vehicle brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect account.
Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address and
password you created when you activated SiriusXM
Guardian™. There will be additional settings to
confirm on the following screen.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the linking
process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote start
Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in Uconnect
Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel level
and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you
peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road.
You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and
pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use
the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that
you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you first
set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can
enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock
button in the app and entering your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle
location, tire pressure warning, and more.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in
your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove
your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™,
active subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if
equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM
Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is
available. If you do not have an active subscription, push
the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on
the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS
Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
information, such as make and model, is transmitted
along with the last known GPS location.
3.
When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
Branded App comes in handy for these and other
situations.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
security measures have been engineered into the
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote services
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App is compatible with
most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
5.
Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands to
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an area with
below average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside assistance
call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2.
If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it
cover towing or other expenses incurred by using
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle
may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that
will cancel the route if selected.
3.
Can I select a different route than the most recent
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your vehicle
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
access to your account. It is your responsibility to
guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more
information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pushing the red Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance your
privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
activate this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
other law enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service
for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have
purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
work together with law enforcement to try to locate
your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3.
Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates?
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services subscription to find out if the
insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your
vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it can take three
minutes or more for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more
quickly. However its range is limited. For example,
when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you
can use the Vehicle Branded App to remote start your
vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device?
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which
is why security measures have been engineered into
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help
to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they
happen to find your device.
4.
Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App?
No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in
the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts
the engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
5.
Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the
cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start
button will not stop the vehicle.
6.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights?
Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote
Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can register
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to an
agent who can assist in registering your new
account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Select the button to speak with an agent, who can
assist in registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Enter your email on the touchscreen and then
follow the prompts from the provided email. You
will receive an email with an activation link that
will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the acti-
vation link, you will be prompted to fill out your
information and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your profile
and demo the remote services.
2.
Why do I need an email address? Without an email
address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM
Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
subscribe to receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote
command requests.
3.
How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during
the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN will be required to authenticate you
when accessing your account via SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call or performing any remote services,
such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4.
What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
If you’ve already activated services and forgot your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment
account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment
Account address can be updated online, or by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
6.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile?
Your name, home address, phone number, email
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and click Save.
7.
Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8.
Can I access every App and service while driving? No,
some applications and services are not available
while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
9.
What happens when my subscription comes up for
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your
account information, your subscription will be
automatically renewed for a term length in
accordance with the service plan that you have
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
selected at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your
subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If
you have not added a credit card to your account,
SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind you that
your subscription is ending soon.
10.
How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi-
cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then
update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11.
How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror or overhead console.
12.
How do I update my credit card information? Login to
your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
13.
How do I find out how much longer I have on my
subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a sub-
scription to view its expiration date. When your sub-
scription is about to expire, you will receive an email
or letter of notification.
14.
Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the
date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15.
Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If
you have an annual subscription, your subscription
will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will be
canceled on the last day of the month in which you
choose to cancel.
16.
What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before
your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll want to
remove your account information. This process
removes all personal information, returns the
Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
and account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system, contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17.
What if I forgot to remove my account information
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
18.
What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible
with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS
Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your
smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance
Call may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location, your
utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.
The collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy
Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected
Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle
health and diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription,
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM
Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance with
the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy
Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 381.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will
provide you vehicle status information while operating on
off-road conditions. It supplies information relating to the
status of the drivetrain, transfer case, coolant/oil gauges,
pitch and roll of the vehicle, and access to the trailcam
system.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the
touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the selectable
page options. It provides continually updating information
for the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control and
Selected Speed in mph (km/h)
Status of Off-Road+ Mode
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Mobile Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Battery Voltage
4 — Transmission Temperature
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
5 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
TRAILCAM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows
you to see an on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the touchscreen.
TrailCam Activation
5
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA) —
I
F EQUIPPED
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notification
of the possible presence of an object, passenger, or pet in
the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to 10 minutes
before the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets
in the rear seats. When the previous conditions are met,
RSRA displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
To enable or disable RSRA, see Ú page 184.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill Descent
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of
the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if
equipped)
Ú page 246.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capa-
bilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of oth-
ers.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to “ESC On”.
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public roadways.
In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF
button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC
Off” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active when
"Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will not switch
to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will remain in "Full
Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by
the driver.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is turned to the “ESC On” mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Each time the ignition is place in the ON position, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previ-
ously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached, then
door must be closed. If doors are detached, then driver
seat belt must be buckled.)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-
vate
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if doors are
attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors are
detached.)
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an indicator light, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or acti-
vated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes
the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC disables
due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the
brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to
Ú
page 184 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pull-
ing a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road con-
ditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively
controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, the driver
seat belt must be buckled).
The driver is not applying throttle.
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The driver seat belt is buckled.
The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, the driver
seat belt must be buckled).
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and
the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Road+
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h)
3rd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
5th = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for SSC
target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling
SSC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode if
active. The differences may be notable to the driver as
a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SSC will exist immediately.
The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if doors are
attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors are
detached).
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a lamp that offers feedback to the driver about
the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
These are the normal operating conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extin-
guish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
Ú page 170.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú page 184.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
warning indicator light when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended
periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or
parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is detected,
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both mirror
lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when the
condition clears. To minimize system blockage, do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
Ú page 254.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 381.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Door Removal
When either the front driver or passenger door is removed,
the instrument cluster will display “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable” and the BSM system will disable. While the
system will continue to indicate whatever blind spot mode
it was previously in within the Uconnect system, no visual
or audible alerts will be provided. As long as the doors are
removed, the instrument cluster will provide the “Blind
Spot Temporarily Unavailable” pop-up as a reminder that
the system is disabled every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will resume
functionality based on the personalized mode selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument
cluster display), and may apply a haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a brake
jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 381.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will
be deactivated until the next key cycle.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW setting menu can be adjusted through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 184.
To turn the FCW system on, select between “Only
Warning” and “Warning and Braking” in the FCW menu.
Select “OFF” in the FCW menu to turn the FCW system
off.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shutdown.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 184.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver of
a possible more distant collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near”
setting, this allows the system to warn the driver of
a possible closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. In rare situations, the system
may react to surrounding objects such as tunnels,
bridges, guardrails, etc. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking,
steering, and acceleration. Unintended braking
reactions can always be overridden by pressing down
hard on the accelerator. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is
inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 345 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value
Ú page 381.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance. Customers are encouraged to
use Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels
to ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle
is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert or Selectable Tire Fill
Alert feature.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing
the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor, and can be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next
ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning
Light to be on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no system
fault exists.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature in the customer settings menu of the
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire
Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is
in deactivation mode (if equipped).
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in
PARK for vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, the parking brake must be applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come on
while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor may be in an inoperative position,
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every time the
ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable the Tire Fill Alert
feature at the next ignition “RUN” state, the customer
must re-enable the feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) —
IF EQUIPPED
The STFA system is an optional feature that is included as
part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate or
deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to, and to
provide feedback while inflating or deflating the vehicle's
tires.
NOTE:
To use the STFA feature, the Tire Fill Alert feature must be
enabled through use of the customer settings in the radio.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you will be able
to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from
XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle
in the Uconnect system application as preset pressure
values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be
stored in the Uconnect system for the front and rear axle.
Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles with
a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating
the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor may
be in an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/
deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA
states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
level.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
(Continued)
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 277.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 277.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 377 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
(Continued)
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
WARNING!
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
(Continued)
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
(Continued)
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. The
figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position
Ú page 284.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
WARNING!
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
WARNING!
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with
a rear seat.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
WARNING!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 117.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System (OCS)
in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to
activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a
properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light (an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the
driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air
Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illumi-
nated.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for
occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of The
Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses
the classification to determine whether it should activate
or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child or small adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD
System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a
child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD
Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may
deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This
can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator Light.
NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indi-
cator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an
adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger
seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in activation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front
passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the
OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not
come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify
the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illu-
minate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac-
tivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-
market seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
WARNING!
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
START or ON/OFF position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including adding any
kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instru-
ment panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps
or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a pro-
jectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”, then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and
tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by
the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual
for more information.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with
the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint
may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it
(Two-Door Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. If
your vehicle is equipped with anchorage symbols on the
seatback, they will be located just above the lower
anchorages.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
Two Door Models – No Center
Seating Position
Four Door Models – Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches
(484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors
in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
Ú page 41.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do
not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a
child seat in the center of the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions.
Please see
Ú page 284 for typical installation
instructions.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 284 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 287 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
Ú page 265 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Two-Door Models)
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations (Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for
using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward-facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward-facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models – Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with
the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see
Ú page 41.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with
the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint
may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it
(Two-Door Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 287 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. If the seat can be moved, you may need
to move the seat forward to provide better access to
the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
Ú page 280.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head
restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located on the back of
the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 125.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. See
Ú page 261 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or
is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
291
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 381.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be
connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its loca-
tion. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a
manual transmission into REVERSE (R).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo area.
To remove jack and tools proceed as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access by pulling
the load floor handle up and directly rearward.
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching the
latch on the left side and pulling upward.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to loosen
the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
SPARE TIRE REMOVAL
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove
the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the lock
bolt counterclockwise with the #T40 torx head driver
and ratchet from the supplied tool kit.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning
them counterclockwise. If equipped, remove the
locking lug nut with the lock key (located in the glove
box) turning it counterclockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic
transmission into PARK; a manual transmission into
REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
NOTE:
If your vehicle comes with factory equipped 35 inch
(88.9 centimeter) tires, a jack lift block is provided in the
rear cargo area. The jack lift block is used to provide
higher ground clearance when changing a flat or spare
tire. When placing the jack lift block under the jack, be
sure the bottom of the jack fits securely inside of the
raised edges of the block.
Jack Lift Box Usage
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the vehicle to
prevent tool damage.
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 368. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare tire
carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the
camera cover by turning the lock clockwise using the
provided #40 torx head driver and ratchet. Then,
reinstall the camera cover by slipping it over the
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
Lock Bolt Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
change the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
Supplemental Battery – If Equipped
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the
engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post – Gas Engine
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the main battery
to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or death
could result if you attempt to jump start using the
supplemental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting.
WARNING!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
Positive (+) Battery Post – Diesel Engine
NOTE:
The positive (+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will
be equipped with two batteries Ú page 147.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in
NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections. Failure to follow these
procedures could result in damage to the charging
system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 RPM
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
See the following steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
manual park release cover located in front of the gear
selector, to access the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up until the release lever locks
into place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now
out of PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is securely
connected to a tow vehicle.
Vertical Released Position
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and you
hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward and
to the left, into its original position.
Original Tether Position
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the release position the access
cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (with
automatic transmission) or SECOND (2) gear and
REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 246. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described
Ú page 176.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle
Ú page 301.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (P)
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear
NOT in NEUTRAL,
for manual transmissions)
Ú page 176.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
Manual Transmission in gear (
NOT in NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case in
NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in
Forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN mode, not
in the OFF mode.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved method of
towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap.
Front Tow Hooks
Rear Tow Hook
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow hook usage may cause
components to break resulting in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Tow straps are recom-
mended when towing the vehicle, chains may cause
vehicle damage.
The tow hooks must not be used to move the vehicle
off the road or where there are obstacles.
Do not use the tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
Do not use the tow hooks to free a stuck vehicle
Ú page 302.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines
are not followed
Ú page 303.
WARNING!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 276.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 277.
7
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Change
Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil
Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime will
sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,
“Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster
Display for further information
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check the engine oil level.
Check the windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed.
Check the function of all interior and exterior lights.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspension,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine.
1
X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler
(if equipped) coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, to reset the message
Ú page 108.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the housing
when the new filter is installed if the residual oil is not
either removed from the housing or enough time has not
elapsed to allow the oil to drain back into the engine.
When servicing the oil filter on this engine, open the filter
cap approximately six turns until the cap o-ring is visible
and stop. Wait five minutes with the cap in this position to
allow dirty engine oil to drain back into the engine. After
five minutes, the cap and filter assembly can be removed
and discarded. When installing the new oil filter cartridge
assembly, ensure the cap is tightened to the specified
torque to prevent low oil pressure conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear or
damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
Change fuel filter.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every other oil change and must not
exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5. If the vehicle is being used in severe
operating conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio,
Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it is recommended to replace the fuel filter every oil change and must not exceed
10,000 miles.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use of biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 371.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap— If Equipped
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine oil,
washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage onto the
top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto the
top of the engine should be removed using compressed
air or an absorbent cloth.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir
is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
NOTE:
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine oil,
washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage onto the
top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is spilled onto the
top of the engine should be removed using compressed
air or an absorbent cloth.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.
They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 298.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection Ú page 374.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in
the system, resulting in damage to essential elec-
trical components.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil
Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use
filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 307 for
gasoline engines or
Ú page 311 for diesel engines.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement— Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using
a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator housing is located inside the left
frame rail in front of the fuel tank. The best access to this
water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
If necessary remove the fuel filter protective cover to
access the water drain valve.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
If water is detected in the water separator while the engine
is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate and an
audible chime will be heard. At this point you should stop
the engine and drain the water from the filter housing.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter housing)
counterclockwise to drain fuel/water; allow the
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open
until all water and contaminants have been removed.
When clear fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning
it clockwise.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter
assembly, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the water was
drained while the engine was running, the Water In Fuel
Indicator Light may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your
vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact an autho-
rized dealer, service station, or government agency for
advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions for Priming If The Engine Has
Run Out Of Fuel
Ú page 323.
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT — DIESEL
E
NGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s
filtration and water separating requirements can severely
impact fuel system life and reliability. We recommend you
use Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to access the
fuel filter assembly.
Fuel Filter Assembly
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
4. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumulated
water and fuel drain.
5. Close the water drain valve.
Fuel Filter Assembly
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing to
prevent contamination from entering fuel system
during service.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the housing
using a socket. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Fuel Filter Assembly
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from the cap
and dispose of according to your local regulations.
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap and
housing.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
1 — Water Drain Valve 1 — Fuel Filter Cap
2 — Socket Adapter
CAUTION!
Take care when handling the new fuel filter to prevent
contamination from entering the fuel system.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean engine oil.
11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the cap.
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing with
clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
13. Push the ignition switch twice without your foot on the
brake to place vehicle in RUN position. This will
activate the in tank fuel pump for approximately 30
seconds. Repeat this process twice to prime the fuel
system. Start the engine using the Normal Starting
procedure. After engine start, verify the fuel filter cap
does not leak.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approx-
imately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot on brake
to put vehicle in RUN position. This will activate the in
tank fuel pump for approximately 30 seconds.
Repeat this process twice to prime the fuel system.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting procedure
Ú page 130.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all
the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can nega-
tively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water
from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system
corrosion or damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of your diesel
engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium Diesel
Fuel Treatment" is recommended to assist with cold
starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated
into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to
allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
engine.
Refer to Instrument Cluster Display for further information
Ú page 108.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by
the name of its active component, UREA—is a key
component of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent
emission regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approximately
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between
cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and be
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use
of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
For further information
Ú page 374.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across the ribbed surface of the belt, from rib to rib,
are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace
a belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are
not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must
be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with the vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the air
filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.
Pull the filter elements out pinching them to the right
for clearance.
Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure retaining
tabs.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may
propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
position ensuring you have properly engaged the
travel dampener.
Travel Dampener
For the proper maintenance intervals, see Ú page 307 for
gasoline engines or
Ú page 311 for diesel engines.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch release
mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
push the release tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper blade
outward to disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm.
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to
place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail gate.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you
Ú page 288.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped)
coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before
the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and
MGU (if equipped) coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system hoses
for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of
the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS
HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
Ú page 307 for
gasoline engines or
Ú page 311 for diesel engines.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 374.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important to use the
same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as engine
oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to minimize spillage
onto the top of the engine. Any excess fluid that is
spilled onto the top of the engine should be removed
using compressed air or an absorbent cloth.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or
HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals
or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately. If
ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
(Continued)
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the ADD
and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. For
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 307.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level within the designated marks on the side of
the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean
the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks
Ú page 376.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 376. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below
the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the
axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer recommended fluid Ú page 376.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 307.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 376.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water,
it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to
the Maintenance Plan for the proper maintenance
intervals
Ú page 307.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended manual
transmission fluid
Ú page 376.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
WARNING!
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 376. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
Ú page 376.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover
is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay location,
function, and size.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Power Distribution Center Location – Gasoline Engine
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location – Diesel Engine
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare *
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 –
20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
25 Amp Clear Fuel Pmp (6.4) *
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare *
F07 – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump *
F08 – 15 Amp Blue TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare *
F10 – 15 Amp Blue KIN / RF HUB / ESCL
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare *
F14 – – Spare *
F15 – 15 Amp Blue IPC / Switch Bank-HD Elec
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – – Spare *
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
F22 – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Motor
Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
F23 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PCM
F24 – – Spare *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare *
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering
Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Driver
Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/Airbag
Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP*
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW ELEC BRK MOD*
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W*
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MGU Coolant Pump (3.6)*
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red PCR Ctrl Feed (ESS) *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare *
F48 – – Spare *
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC*
F51 – 10 Amp Red Digital TV Inline / USB / ISRVM / Compass Mod
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare *
F54 – – Spare *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR/PTC HTR COIL FEED
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare *
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 –
– Spare *
10 Amp Red Exhaust Sol *
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare *
F65 – – Spare *
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare *
F68 – – Spare *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F69 – 5 Amp Tan Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG)*
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare *
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG*
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
F75 – 10 Amp Red
Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary Power
Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator (BSG)*
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red INTRUSION MOD/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 –
15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) / SOL 1,2 BLOCK SHIFT *
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve (BSG) *
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR*
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG*
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT*
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR*
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2*
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP*
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2*
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control (CRUISE
CTL)/Digital TV (DTV) / EVIC / Airbag Disable Lamp
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP*
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – – Spare *
F95 – – Spare *
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare *
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3*
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP*
F105 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – ESC -PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT*
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4*
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT*
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-
tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions
change to allow the condensation to change back into a
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to
the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter turn
clockwise.
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service
Manual.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb
straight from the socket to replace.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electrical connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
HALOGEN FRONT FOG LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND BACKUP
LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access single
retaining screw for tail lamp assembly.
Trim Cap
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical
connector, then remove tail lamp assembly from the
vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located inboard
behind the lamp housing.
3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket to
access bulb sockets.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise, then remove it from the housing.
Bulb Removal
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the swing gate behind the spare tire. If
service is needed, obtain the LED Assembly from an
authorized dealer.
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and
disconnect electrical connector.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above. When
installing the new bulb, care should be taken to not allow
bare skin to come in contact with the bulb.
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with bead-lock wheels, please
refer to your vehicles bead-lock specific part number for
additional information and instructions on mopar.com or
by contacting an authorized dealer.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 169.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing Ú page 169.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lb (392
kg).
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven in a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 302.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spin-
ning wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information
Ú page 354.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 346.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 174.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire,
as recommended by the snow traction device manu-
facturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the
snow traction device.
Please follow the table for the recommended tire size,
axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum
Projection Beyond Tire Profile Or
Equivalent)
Sport
Rear
245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
Willy’s LT255/75R17C
Autosock
Sahara 255/70R18
Rubicon LT285/70R17C
High Altitude 275/55R20
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 307. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system then
disconnect both the main and supplemental negative
battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery connection
point, as well as the main battery terminal from the
post, as shown in the image, to fully de-energize both
batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
nect the battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS),
or your Stop/Start system may not function for up to 24
hours, due to the IBS being set into learn mode.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it
can cause a potential power spike or surge in the
system, resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
8
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior trim
and top, follow these precautions:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.
Window scratches and wax build-up may result.
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on
the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles.
If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar® Convertible Cloth
Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on
the entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing
the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow
the top to dry before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows which
can be scratched unless special care is taken by following
these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,
use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep® Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protec-
tion to help prevent yellowing.
When washing,
never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with
a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
When removing frost, snow or ice,
never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
clean the window quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer opera-
tion. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
will eventually impact window plastic retainer opera-
tion. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer should be
cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a
mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning prod-
ucts are available through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
carpet that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when the
carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing
stations. Wash the vehicle only by hand using neutral
pH detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather.
Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be
used for cleaning the car.
Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and
thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly
aggressive.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when
dried, it may only be possible to remove them with
abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly
inadvisable as they could alter the typical opaque-
ness of the paint.
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for cleaning
the front windshield and rear window; dilute it to a
minimum of 50% water. Only use pure windshield
washer fluid when strictly necessary due to outside
temperature conditions.
CAUTION!
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for
the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split
and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet
to the front (do not remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Carpet Split
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to inter-
fere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the carpet and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install carpet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use manufacturer
approved carpet for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check that the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check
for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
1 — Grommets
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and
then remove the last two grommets.
Front Seat And Floor
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one right). First the grommet for the cargo carpet
and then the rear carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the rear seats brackets.
Under Rear Seat
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
1 — Grommets
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Carpet Split
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and one right).
First the grommet from the side carpet and then the
rear carpet.
Side Carpet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seats brackets.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet
split around the seat belt attachment.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Grommet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the side
support and then pull the carpet out.
Rear Load Floor
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left
and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet
split around the seat belt attachment and under the
center seat bracket.
Under Rear Seat
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all
around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
Inside Sidewall
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one
(left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all
around the perimeter and open the carpet split
around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these steps
in reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and refasten
grommets.
1 — Side Support
2 — Load Floor
3 — Side Support
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
8
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the A-pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts
and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts
and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier located on the
swing gate.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 ft-lb (80 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 369
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than recommended can cause engine failure and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline having
an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane premium
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or under heavy load conditions
such as while towing.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded regular gasoline having
an octane rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline will
not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
9
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT.
Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline
may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you
should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline
contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 371
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with
Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to
the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in
your vehicle. For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American Society
for Testing and Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15
will provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to
extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No.
2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide
better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the
fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the
fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality
fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If
available in your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel
may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take advantage
of the high energy content and generally lower cost No. 2
Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
climatized diesel fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline on your
diesel vehicle, do not start the engine. Damage to the
engine and fuel system could occur. Please call an
authorized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM spec-
ification D-975 may be used with your diesel engine
without any adjustments to regular service schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not neces-
sary for the proper operation of your diesel engine.
No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used
where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or -23°C)
exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D975 is recommended for use with your
diesel engine. If frequent operation with Biodiesel blends
that are between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter replacement
is subject to shorter intervals when operating your engine
on biodiesel greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater
than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) it is important that you understand and comply
with these requirements
Ú page 311.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources
typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rapeseed
Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester
(SME or SOME) base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which require that
you understand and adhere to the following requirements
if you use blends of Biodiesel between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20). There are no unique restrictions for the use of
B5.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START engine before you drain the water from the fuel
filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 321.
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements for
vehicles operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and
20% (B6–B20) will result in premature engine wear.
Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use of
blends greater than 20% can result in engine damage.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
9
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both storage
and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low
ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a
heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold
temperature additives.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only fuel
produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following
specifications may be blended to meet Biodiesel blend
B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975
and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM specification
D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can result
in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to approved
ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides for protection
against fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water
accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar® filtration
system is designed to provide adequate fuel water
separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with the
use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed 5%. To
ensure this limit is met your oil change interval must be
maintained within the suggested schedule. The regular
use of biodiesel between 6% and 20% requires intervals
shorter than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,000 km) and
must not exceed the suggested schedule. When routinely
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil and filter
replacement intervals must not exceed 8,000 miles
(12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel filter
change intervals. When operating on biodiesel between
6% and 20%, fuel filter replacement intervals should be
every second oil change, and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or 6 months, if regular
operation occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Under no
circumstances should fuel filter replacement intervals
exceed every second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation occurs
with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to comply with
these Oil Change and fuel filter requirements for vehicles
operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer
severe damage if operated with concentrations of
biodiesel higher than 20%.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with biodiesel and
not used for more than a month, the fuel should either
be used up by driving (up to quarter tank) and filled with
standard diesel blends with less than 5% that is
normally available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
clogging and potential damage to the fuel injection
system due to degraded biodiesel, which is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 373
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 gal 66 L
Four Door Models 21.5 gal 81 L
3.0L Diesel Engine 18.3 gal 69 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 gal 19.3 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.73 L
3.0L Diesel Engine 9 qt 8.5 L
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine 11.8 qt 11.2 L
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.7 qt 3.5 L
3.6L Engine 13.4 qt 12.7 L
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 2.3 qt 2.2 L
3.6L Power Pack Unit (PPU) Coolant 3.1 qt 2.9 L
3.0L Diesel Engine 14 qt 13.2 L
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
GASOLINE ENGINES
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark
Ú page 318.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 318.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 375
DIESEL ENGINES
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 5W-40 engine oil can be used but must be compliant to API SN/SP and
ACEA A3/B4 specifications.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Using a fuel filter
that does not meet the manufacturer filtration and water separating requirements can
severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
9
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law
requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm
Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm
Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round
service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. We recommend using a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20%
biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance
intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been API
Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may
result in system damage.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ) We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)(API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
377
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where
services are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc.,
Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
10
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be mailed
to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by FCA
US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 379
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US
LLC has installed special Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to
a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English /(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
10
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 381
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
10
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 368
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ................................................... 151
, 152
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 329
Adding Fuel.......................................................... 165
, 166
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 369
Advance Phone Connectivity....................................... 220
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 269
Air Bag Warning Light ....................................267
, 269
Enhanced Accident Response ......................276
, 305
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 305
Front Air Bag .................................................. 268
, 269
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 275
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 274
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 277
Maintenance........................................................... 277
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 267
Transporting Pets.................................................... 288
Air Bag Light ...............................................117
, 267, 289
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 319
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 324
Air Conditioner Refrigerant................................. 324
, 325
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 324
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 59
, 325
Air Conditioning System..................................................59
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................59
Air Filter......................................................................... 319
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................................... 352
Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................20
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Security Alarm...................................................19
, 119
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Android Auto........................................................ 222
, 223
Android Auto™
S
.......................................................222
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 329
, 373
Disposal ...................................................................330
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................244
Anti-Lock Warning Light................................................119
Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 222
, 225
Apple CarPlay®
S
......................................................224
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................249
Audio Settings ...............................................................208
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................184
Auto Down Power Windows............................................66
Automatic Dimming Mirror............................................. 45
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................23
Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 51
Automatic High Beams................................................... 51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 59
Automatic Transmission...............................................138
Adding Fluid .............................................................333
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................333
Fluid Change............................................................333
Fluid Level Check ....................................................333
Fluid Type....................................................... 333
, 376
Gear Ranges ............................................................138
Special Additives .....................................................333
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ............... 139
AutoPark ....................................................................... 127
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 62
Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 62
Auxiliary Switches........................................................... 64
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 376
Axle Lock....................................................................... 144
B
Battery..................................................................117, 317
Charging System Light............................................ 117
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 14
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 288
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................252
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing.................................216
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 326
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 349
Brake Assist System.....................................................245
Brake Control System .................................................. 245
Brake Fluid...........................................................331
, 376
Brake System ......................................................331
, 368
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 368
Fluid Check.............................................................. 331
Master Cylinder .......................................................331
Parking..................................................................... 133
Warning Light .......................................................... 117
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 138
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
383
Bulb Replacement ..............................................342, 343
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 290
, 342
Bumper End Cap Removal .......................................... 178
C
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 163
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 373
Caps, Filler
Fuel.......................................................................... 165
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 314
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 330
Car Washes .................................................................. 361
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 290
Cargo Load Floor.......................................................... 102
Cargo Tie-Downs .......................................................... 102
Carpeting ...................................................................... 363
CD.................................................................................. 210
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 240
Center High Mounted Stop Light................................. 345
Certification Label........................................................ 169
Chains, Tire................................................................... 357
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 346
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)...... 125
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 288
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 288
Child Restraint.............................................................. 277
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 279
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 286
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 284
Infant And Child Restraints.................................... 278
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ........................... 282
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 280
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................278
Seating Positions.....................................................280
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................369
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................356
Climate Control
Automatic................................................................... 54
Manual ....................................................................... 57
Cold Weather Operation...............................................128
Compact Spare Tire......................................................355
Connected Services................ 225
, 226, 227, 228, 237
Connector
UCI ..............................................................................61
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)......................... 61
Console............................................................................ 60
Floor ...........................................................................60
Contract, Service ..........................................................379
Controls .........................................................................201
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................330
Cooling System .............................................................328
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................329
Coolant Level ...........................................................330
Cooling Capacity......................................................373
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................330
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................329
Inspection ...................................................... 329
, 330
Points To Remember...............................................331
Pressure Cap ...........................................................330
Radiator Cap............................................................330
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 329
, 373, 374
Corrosion Protection.....................................................360
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .......................... 151
, 152
Cruise Light ......................................................... 123
, 124
Customer Assistance ................................................... 377
Customer Programmable Features............................. 184
Cybersecurity ................................................................184
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 51
Dealer Service .............................................................. 318
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................289
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers............................................ 53
Deleting A Phone .......................................................... 216
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................................124
Diesel
Display Messages ................................................... 115
Diesel Fuel .................................................................... 371
Diesel Fuel Requirements ...........................................371
Bulk Storage Of ....................................................... 167
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .................................. 323
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 51
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 317
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................................ 303
Disc Drive...................................................................... 210
Disconnecting...............................................................216
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................330
Disturb........................................................................... 219
Door Ajar ..............................................................117
, 119
Door Ajar Light.....................................................117
, 119
Door Frame..................................................................... 95
Installation................................................................. 95
Removal..................................................................... 95
11
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384
Door Locks
Automatic ...................................................................23
Door Off Mirror Kit...........................................................29
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped
S
............................29
Doors................................................................................20
Removal ..............................................................24
, 27
Removal, Front...........................................................24
Removal, Rear ...........................................................27
Drag & Drop.................................................................. 200
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ......................... 321
Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 207
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............................................37
, 38
Driving........................................................................... 178
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 245
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 244
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..............................245
, 251
Electric Remote Mirrors..................................................46
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......................62
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................62
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 246
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light................... 118
Emergency
In Case Of................................................................ 291
SOS Emergency Call ............................................... 291
Emergency Brake......................................................... 133
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking..................................................................... 293
Jump Starting.......................................................... 298
Tow Hooks............................................................... 304
Emission Control System Maintenance...................... 125
Engine............................................................................314
Air Cleaner ...............................................................319
Block Heater ............................................................129
Break-In Recommendations...................................133
Checking Oil Level ...................................................317
Compartment........................................ 314
, 315, 316
Compartment Identification.................314
, 315, 316
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................................374
Cooling .....................................................................328
Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................290
Fails To Start............................................................128
Flooded, Starting .....................................................128
Fuel Requirements........................................ 369
, 373
Idling.........................................................................131
Jump Starting...........................................................298
Oil ..........................................................318
, 373, 374
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................314
Oil Filter....................................................................319
Oil Reset...................................................................110
Oil Selection................................................... 318
, 373
Oil Synthetic.............................................................318
Starting.....................................................................126
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 276
, 305
Ethanol ..........................................................................370
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................................................290
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................................290
Exhaust System .................................................. 290
, 328
Exterior Lights ........................................................50
, 290
F
Fabric Care....................................................................361
Fabric Top......................................................................361
Family Alerts..................................................................236
FAQ ................................................................................237
Features........................................................................228
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................319
Air Conditioning................................................ 59
, 325
Engine Fuel.............................................................. 321
Engine Oil.................................................................319
Engine Oil Disposal .................................................319
Flashers
Hazard Warning....................................................... 291
Turn Signal...............................................................290
Turn Signals....................................................123
, 344
Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 51
Flat Tire Changing ...............................................345
, 355
Flat Tire Stowage.................................................345
, 355
Flooded Engine Starting............................................... 128
Fluid Capacities ............................................................ 373
Fluid Leaks.................................................................... 290
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission .............................................332
Fluid Level Checks ....................................................... 332
Brake........................................................................331
Engine Oil.................................................................317
Fluid, Brake...................................................................376
Fog Lights...................................................................... 344
Fog Lights, Service .......................................................344
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat........................................... 39
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 37
Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 39
Folding Windshield ......................................................... 97
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................255
Four Wheel Drive ..........................................................140
Operation........................................................140
, 141
Shifting..................................................................... 140
System ..................................................................... 140
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
385
Four Wheel Drive Operation ........................................ 142
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ............................................ 291
Freedom Panels..............................................................86
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................................... 302
Front Axle (Differential)................................................ 332
Fuel ...................................................................... 369
, 371
Adding............................................................. 165
, 166
Additives.................................................................. 369
Clean Air .................................................................. 369
Ethanol .................................................................... 370
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)................................................ 165
Filter......................................................................... 321
Gasoline .................................................................. 369
Materials Added...................................................... 369
Methanol ................................................................. 370
Octane Rating ................................................ 369
, 374
Requirements ................................................ 371
, 373
Specifications................................................. 371
, 374
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 373
Fueling ................................................................. 165
, 166
Fuses ............................................................................ 333
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................................47
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ....................................165
, 166
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 369
Gasoline, Clean Air....................................................... 369
Gasoline, Reformulated............................................... 369
Gauges
Voltage..................................................................... 130
Gear Ranges........................................................ 135
, 138
Getting Started............................................................. 227
Glass Cleaning ..............................................................367
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.............................. 170
, 171
GVWR.............................................................................169
H
Half-Door Installation .....................................................31
Half-Door Installation — If Equipped
S
......................31
Hard Top.......................................................................... 66
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal
S
.......................... 83
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................291
Head Restraints .............................................................. 41
Headlights
Automatic................................................................... 51
Bulb Replacement...................................................343
Cleaning ...................................................................361
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...................... 51
Lights On Reminder................................................... 51
Passing....................................................................... 51
Replacing .................................................................343
Heated Mirrors................................................................ 46
Heated Seats .................................................................. 41
Heated Steering Wheel .................................................. 37
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch........... 51
Hill Descent Control......................................................248
Hill Descent Control Indicator......................................248
Hill Start Assist..............................................................249
Hitches
Trailer Towing ..........................................................172
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................................. 47
Hood Prop .....................................................................100
Hood Release................................................................100
I
Ignition ............................................................................ 15
Switch ........................................................................ 15
In Case Of Emergency..................................................291
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................... 45
Instrument Cluster .......................................................104
Descriptions ............................................................ 123
Display ..................................................................... 108
Engine Oil Reset...................................................... 110
Menu Items .............................................................112
Instrument Cluster
S
................................................ 108
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................................367
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...............................334
Interior And Instrument Lights....................................... 52
Interior Appearance Care............................................. 362
Interior Lights.................................................................. 52
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)............................... 53
Intervention Regeneration Strategy............................ 323
Introduction .................................................................. 226
Inverter
Power ......................................................................... 63
J
Jack Location................................................................294
Jack Operation.............................................................. 295
Jacking And Tire Changing
S
...................................293
Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 295
Jump Starting ...............................................................298
11
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386
K
Key Fob
Arm The System.........................................................20
Disarm The System....................................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................15
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™......................................................21
Passive Entry..............................................................21
Keys .................................................................................13
Replacement..............................................................15
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................52
Lap/Shoulder Belts...................................................... 262
Latches ......................................................................... 290
Hood ...............................................................100
, 118
Leaks, Fluid .................................................................. 290
Life Of Tires .................................................................. 354
Light Bulbs........................................................... 290
, 342
Lights ............................................................................ 290
Air Bag ...................................................117
, 267, 289
Automatic Headlights ................................................51
Brake Assist Warning ............................................. 247
Brake Warning ........................................................ 117
Bulb Replacement .........................................342
, 343
Center Mounted Stop ............................................. 345
Cruise..............................................................123
, 124
Daytime Running .......................................................51
Dimmer Switch, Headlight.........................................51
Electric Power Steering .......................................... 118
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .. 118
, 119
Exterior ............................................................. 50
, 290
Fog ........................................................................... 344
Fuel Filler Cap..........................................................120
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................291
Headlights................................................................343
High Beam ................................................................. 51
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................................51
Hill Descent Control Indicator.................................248
Interior........................................................................ 52
Lights On Reminder................................................... 51
Low Fuel...................................................................120
Low Washer Fluid ....................................................120
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....................120
Oil Temperature.......................................................118
Park ..........................................................................123
Passing....................................................................... 51
Rear Servicing..........................................................344
Rear Tail Lamps.......................................................344
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................118
Security Alarm..........................................................119
Service ........................................................... 342
, 343
Side Marker .............................................................344
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)............................257
Traction Control .......................................................247
Transmission Temperature.....................................119
Turn Signal...............................................................290
Turn Signals................................................... 123
, 344
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions.... 118
, 123
Load Floor, Cargo..........................................................102
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode...................................114
Load Shed Battery Saver On........................................114
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .........................114
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor..........................114
Loading Vehicle.............................................................169
Tires..........................................................................349
Locking
Axle...........................................................................144
Locks
Automatic Door ......................................................... 23
Child Protection......................................................... 23
Power Door ................................................................ 21
Low Tire Pressure System............................................ 257
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
S
.... 67
Lubrication, Body.......................................................... 326
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 368
Luggage Carrier ............................................................ 102
M
Maintenance................................................................... 91
Maintenance Free Battery ........................................... 317
Maintenance Schedule.......................................306
, 310
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ......120
, 125
Manage My Account..................................................... 237
Manual
Park Release ........................................................... 301
Service ..................................................................... 380
Manual Transmission..........................................134
, 332
Fluid Level Check....................................................332
Lubricant Selection........................................332
, 376
Shift Speeds ............................................................ 135
Media Mode..................................................................210
Methanol....................................................................... 370
Mirrors............................................................................. 45
Automatic Dimming .................................................. 45
Electric Powered ....................................................... 46
Electric Remote......................................................... 46
Heated ....................................................................... 46
Outside....................................................................... 46
Rearview .................................................................... 45
Vanity ......................................................................... 46
Mobile App.................................................................... 227
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
387
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle..........................................................................8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 257
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 379
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ....................................... 133
O
Occupant Restraints .................................................... 261
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 369
, 374
Off Road Pages ............................................................ 241
Accessory Gauges.......................................... 241
, 242
Drivetrain........................................................ 241
, 242
Pitch And Roll................................................. 241
, 242
Status Bar ............................................................... 241
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
S
.......................... 110
Oil Filter, Change.......................................................... 319
Oil Filter, Selection ....................................................... 319
Oil Pressure Light ......................................................... 118
Oil Reset ....................................................................... 110
Oil, Engine............................................................ 318
, 374
Capacity................................................................... 373
Checking.................................................................. 317
Dipstick.................................................................... 317
Disposal................................................................... 319
Filter......................................................................... 319
Filter Disposal ......................................................... 319
Identification Logo.................................................. 318
Materials Added To................................................. 319
Pressure Warning Light.......................................... 118
Recommendation .......................................... 318
, 373
Synthetic ..................................................................318
Viscosity ...................................................................373
Onboard Diagnostic System.........................................124
Operating Precautions..................................................124
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.......................................................380
Outside Rearview Mirrors...............................................46
P
Paddle Shifters .............................................................140
Paint Care......................................................................360
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
S
.....................................................................214
Parking Brake ...............................................................133
ParkSense System, Rear..............................................160
Passive Entry................................................................... 21
Personalized Main Menu Bar.......................................200
Pets................................................................................288
Phone Mode..................................................................212
Placard, Tire And Loading Information........................349
Power
Brakes ......................................................................368
Door Locks................................................................. 21
Inverter.......................................................................63
Mirrors........................................................................ 46
Steering....................................................................146
Windows.....................................................................65
Power Sliding Top ........................................................... 91
Operation ................................................................... 91
Pinch Protect ............................................................. 91
Quarter Window Removal......................................... 93
Power Steering Fluid ....................................................376
Pow
er Top Quarter Windows ......................................... 93
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................265
Preparation For Jacking ...............................................294
Presets .......................................................................... 207
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................................ 265
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................................. 353
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .........................330
Radio
Presets.....................................................................207
Radio Controls .............................................................. 201
Radio Mode .................................................................. 201
Radio Operation ..................................................201
, 240
Radio Remote Controls................................................201
Raising The Soft Top
S
............................................... 77
Rear Axle (Differential)................................................. 332
Rear Camera.................................................................163
Rear Cross Path............................................................ 254
Rear ParkSense System .............................................. 160
Rear Seat Reminder Alert............................................ 244
Rear Swing Gate........................................................... 101
Rear Wiper/Washer ....................................................... 54
Recreational Towing..................................................... 176
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................. 177
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ............. 177
Reformulated Gasoline ................................................ 369
Refrigerant.................................................................... 325
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 226
Release, Hood .............................................................. 100
Reminder, Seat Belt ..................................................... 261
11
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388
Remote Control
Starting System..........................................................17
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ................ 231
, 237
Remote Features, Horn And Lights............................. 232
Remote Features, Starting ................................. 231
, 238
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................................20
Disarm The Alarm ......................................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...................... 201
Remote Start (Diesel) .....................................................19
Remote Start (Gas) .........................................................17
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........18
Uconnect Settings......................................................18
Remote Starting System..........................................17
, 19
Removable Doors.....................................................24
, 27
Front ...........................................................................24
Rear ............................................................................27
Removable Top ...............................................................91
Removing The Soft Top
S
...........................................80
Replacement Bulbs...................................................... 342
Replacement Keys ..........................................................15
Replacement Tires ....................................................... 354
Reporting Safety Defects............................................. 379
Restraints, Child........................................................... 277
Restraints, Head .............................................................41
Roadside Assistance........................................... 232
, 237
Roll Over Warning .............................................................8
Roof Type Carrier ......................................................... 102
Rotation, Tires .............................................................. 358
S
Safety.............................................................................200
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................288
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................290
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................379
Safety Features.............................................................200
Safety Information, Tire................................................345
Safety Tips.....................................................................288
Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................290
Satellite Radio...............................................................203
Saved Radio Stations ...................................................207
Schedule, Maintenance ..................................... 306
, 310
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................................118
Seat Belts............................................................ 261
, 288
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................264
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..................264
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..........264
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........................265
Child Restraints .......................................................277
Energy Management Feature.................................265
Extender...................................................................265
Front Seat ............................................. 261
, 262, 263
Inspection ................................................................288
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................263
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................264
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................................262
Operating Instructions.............................................263
Pregnant Women.....................................................265
Pretensioners ..........................................................265
Rear Seat .................................................................262
Reminder .................................................................261
Seat Belt Extender...................................................265
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 265
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 264
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 367
Seats ............................................................................... 37
Adjustment ................................................................ 37
Fold And Tumble Rear .............................................. 39
Heated ....................................................................... 41
Height Adjustment .................................................... 38
Rear Folding .............................................................. 37
Tilting ......................................................................... 37
Security Alarm ....................................................... 19
, 119
Arm The System ........................................................ 20
Disarm The System................................................... 20
Selec - Speed Control...................................................250
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................ 374
Send & Go............................................................233
, 238
Sentry Key (Immobilizer)................................................ 15
Sentry Key Replacement ............................................... 15
Service Assistance .......................................................377
Service Contract ........................................................... 379
Service Manuals........................................................... 380
Settings .........................................................................184
Settings, Audio.............................................................. 208
Shifting.......................................................................... 137
Automatic Transmission................................137
, 138
Manual Transmission .............................................134
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)..........................................................177
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)..........................................................177
Shoulder Belts .............................................................. 262
Side Step Removal.......................................................178
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
389
Signals, Turn...............................................123, 290, 344
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 203
Favorites.................................................................. 206
Replay...................................................................... 205
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 206
Favorites.................................................................. 206
Replay...................................................................... 205
Smart Watch................................................................. 236
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 357
Snow Tires .................................................................... 355
Soft Top ....................................................................66
, 74
Soft Top Windows ...........................................................74
SOS Call ............................................................... 228
, 237
Spare Tires .................................................295
, 355, 356
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)........................................................ 374
Oil............................................................................. 374
Speed Control
Accel/Decel............................................................. 152
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)........................................... 155
Cancel...................................................................... 152
Resume ................................................................... 152
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ................................... 152
Starting ................................................................ 126
, 129
Automatic Transmission................................126
, 129
Button.........................................................................15
Cold Weather .......................................................... 128
Engine Block Heater............................................... 129
Engine Fails To Start............................................... 128
Manual Transmission ............................................. 126
Remote.......................................................................17
Starting And Operating ................................................ 126
Starting Procedures ............................................126
, 129
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines)..........................129
Steering ........................................................................... 36
Power .......................................................................146
Tilt Column................................................................. 36
Wheel, Heated ...........................................................37
Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 36
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................201
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................201
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................................. 234
, 238
Stop/Start ........................................................... 147
, 149
Storage .............................................................. 60
, 74, 93
Behind the Seat......................................................... 61
Storage, Vehicle............................................................359
Store Radio Presets......................................................207
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................359
Stuck, Freeing...............................................................302
Sun Roof.......................................................................... 91
Sunrider® For Hard Top ................................................. 89
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic .................................................................145
Sway Control, Trailer.....................................................251
Swing Gate, Rear ..........................................................101
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................318
System, Remote Starting ...............................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................ 36
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 59
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................................102
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................36
Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................349
Tire Markings ................................................................345
Tire Safety Information.................................................345
Tires................................................... 290
, 352, 355, 358
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................354
Air Pressure ............................................................. 352
Chains...................................................................... 357
Changing.................................................................. 293
Compact Spare........................................................355
General Information.......................................352
, 355
High Speed .............................................................. 353
Inflation Pressure.................................................... 352
Life Of Tires ............................................................. 354
Load Capacity.......................................................... 349
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............121
, 257
Quality Grading........................................................358
Radial....................................................................... 353
Replacement ........................................................... 354
Rotation ...................................................................358
Safety..............................................................345
, 352
Sizes.........................................................................346
Snow Tires ...............................................................355
Spare Tires ........................................... 295
, 355, 356
Spinning...................................................................353
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 354
Wheel Nut Torque ...................................................368
To Open Hood ...............................................................100
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight..................................... 173
Top
Dual............................................................................ 66
Hard ........................................................................... 66
Power Sliding............................................................. 91
Removable................................................................. 66
Soft............................................................................. 66
Tow Hooks
Emergency...............................................................304
11
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390
Towing.........................................................170, 172, 303
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 303
Recreational............................................................ 176
Weight...................................................................... 172
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 176
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle ................................................................. 144
Traction Control............................................................ 251
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 251
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 170
Hitches .................................................................... 172
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 173
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................172
, 173
Wiring....................................................................... 174
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 172
Trailer Weight ............................................................... 172
Transfer Case ............................................................... 332
Fluid......................................................................... 376
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation.......................... 141
, 142
Maintenance........................................................... 332
Transmission ................................................................ 138
Automatic ....................................................... 138
, 333
Fluid......................................................................... 376
Maintenance........................................................... 333
Manual .................................................................... 134
Shifting .................................................................... 137
Transporting Pets......................................................... 288
Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 354
Turn Signals......................................................... 123
, 344
U
UCI Connector .................................................................61
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ............................................... 217
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone..................................................................220
Uconnect Settings ..................................................... 18
Uconnect Phone ................................................. 214
, 215
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................................219
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress.............................219
Bluetooth Communication Link..............................222
Call Continuation.....................................................220
Call Controls.............................................................218
Call Termination ......................................................220
Cancel Command....................................................214
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio
Device After Pairing............................................216
Help Command........................................................214
Join Calls ..................................................................220
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite .........216
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress..............................................................220
Managing Your Favorites ........................................217
Natural Speech........................................................214
Operation .................................................................213
Overview...................................................................212
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone....214
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..............215
Phonebook Download.............................................217
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................219
Power-Up..................................................................222
Recent Calls.............................................................218
Redial .......................................................................220
To Remove A Favorite .............................................217
Toggling Between Calls...........................................220
Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 218
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone..............220
Voice Command...................................................... 220
Uconnect Settings ........................................................184
Customer Programmable Features .........18
, 21, 184
Passive Entry Programming ..................................... 21
Uconnect System.......................................................... 197
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 358
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ........... 61
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
S
.............................................................. 47
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................264
USB.................................................................................. 61
USB Port.......................................................................... 61
V
Vanity Mirrors ................................................................. 46
Vehicle Finder ......................................................233
, 238
Vehicle Health Alert...................................................... 235
Vehicle Health Report .................................................. 234
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)............................ 368
Vehicle Loading ...................................................169
, 349
Vehicle Maintenance ...................................................318
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....................................8
Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 235
Vehicle Settings............................................................ 184
Vehicle Storage............................................................. 359
Voice Command ...........................................44
, 223, 225
Climate....................................................................... 59
Voice Recognition........................................................... 44
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................................... 44
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
391
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions)..... 120
Warnings, Roll Over........................................................... 8
Warranty Information................................................... 379
Washers, Windshield ................................................... 317
Washing Vehicle........................................................... 361
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel............................................................... 321
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care......................................... 356
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ......................................... 356
Wi-Fi...............................................................................233
Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 66
Window Fogging..............................................................59
Window Storage.............................................................. 74
Windows.......................................................................... 65
Power ......................................................................... 65
Windshield
Folding........................................................................ 97
Windshield Defroster....................................................289
Windshield Washers ............................................. 53
, 317
Fluid .........................................................................317
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 326
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 53
Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 326
Wipers, Rear ................................................................... 54
11
23_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Second Edition
23_JL_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
